Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutSTANDARD SPECIFICATIONS Cityof Waterloo Permeable Alley Contract No . 905 Standard Specifications By: Monica Smith,PE Robinson Engineering Company 322 First Street East Independence,IA 50644 I hereby certify that this Engineering document was prepared by me or under my direct personal supervision and that „o\�p M$i I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer ' `NCEmseo iy under the laws of the State of Iowa. MONICA M.SMITH LICENSE NO 15074 15074 ''°\e, Town � ,..' Vebteur.,;,,s471t2tiX ne ate SS70NAt E� Pages or sheets covered by this seal: .,,,no-, .. Specifications My renewal date is December 31.2017 WATERLOO PERMEABLE PAVER ALLEY CONTRACT NO. 905 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS 1. NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING 2. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 3. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 4. FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 5. SALES TAX EXEMPTION INFORMATION FORM 6. FORM OF BID BOND 7. NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVITS 8. EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE 9. TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS 10. RESIDENT BIDDER AND NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION 11. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM 12. POTENTIAL ITEMS OF WORK FOR MBE/WBE PARTICIPATION SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM, LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES, MBE/WBE SCOPE LE 1"1'ER, A MBE AND/OR WBE PREBID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM 13. WATERLOO/CEDAR FALLS MINORITY AND WOMEN BUSINESSES ENTERPRISE CONSTRUCTION AND MAINTENANCE CONTRACTOR'S GUIDE 14. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 15. GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 16. SPECIAL PROVISIONS 17. GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 18. SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 19. FORM OF CONTRACT 20. FORM OF PERFORMANCE BOND 21. FORM OF PAYMENT BOND 3 TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE OF PUBLIC HEARING On Proposed Plans, Specifications,Form of Contract, And Estimate of Cost For the FY 2017 City of Waterloo Permeable Alley In the City of Waterloo,Iowa CONTRACT NO. 905 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 2nd day of February, 2017 until 1:00 p.m. for the construction of the FY 2017 City of Waterloo Permeable Alley, Contract No. 905 as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in the First Floor Conference Room at City Hall, in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 2nd day of February, 2017 at 1:00 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed by the City Council. PUBLIC HEARING Notice is hereby given that the Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on the 6th day of February, 2017, said hearing to be held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers in City Hall in said City. The proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for said improvements heretofore prepared by Robinson Engineering Company are now on file in the office of the City Clerk for public examination, and any person interested therein may file written objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto with the City Clerk before the date set for said hearing, or appear and make objection thereto at the meeting above set forth. The NOTICE TO BIDDERS can be viewed at the following locations: 1) City of Waterloo web site at http://ci.waterloo.ia.us/ 2) Plan rooms: Master Builders of Iowa 221 Park Street, PO Box 695 Des Moines, IA 50303 5 TA E OF CONTENTS McGraw Hill Construction Dodge 3315 Central Ave. Hot Springs, AR 71913 Reed Construction Data 30 Technology Parkway South, Ste. 500 Norcross, GA 30092 3) Plan Room Web sites: Master Builders of Iowa web site at www.mbionline.com Dodge Lead web site: http://dodgeprojects.construction.com/ Reed Const. Data Lead web site: http://www.cmdgroup.com/project-leads/ SCOPE OF WORK The extent of the work involved is installation of a permeable alley in downtown Waterloo. Published pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the City Code of Iowa and upon order to the City Council of said Waterloo, Iowa, on the 1st day of January, 2017. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA BY: Suzy Schares City Clerk 6 TABLE OF CONTENTS NOTICE TO BIDDERS For the Taking of Construction Bids for the FY 2017 City of Waterloo Permeable Alley In the City of Waterloo, Iowa CONTRACT NO. 905 RECEIVING OF BIDS Sealed proposals will be received by the City Clerk of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, at her office in the City Hall of the said City on the 2nd day of February, 2017_until 1:00 p.m. for the construction of the FY 2017 City of Waterloo Permeable Alley, Contract No. 905, as described in detail in the plans and specifications now on file in the Office of the City Clerk. OPENING OF BIDS All proposals received will be opened in the First Floor Conference Room at City Hall, in the City of Waterloo, Iowa, on the 2nd day of February, 2017, at 1:00 p.m., and the proposals will be acted upon at such later time and place as may then be fixed by the City Council. PUBLIC HEARING The Council of said City will conduct a public hearing on the proposed plans, specifications, form of contract, and estimate of cost for the construction of the above-described improvement project at 5:30 p.m. on 6th day of February, 2017 said hearing to be held in the Harold E. Getty Council Chambers in City Hall in said City. SCOPE OF WORK The extent of the work involved is removing the current pavement in the alleyway between East Sth Street and East 6th Street and replacing it with a permeable paver surface. This project is generally located in an area bound by: East 5th Street, East 6th Street, Commercial Street, and Jefferson Street BEGINNING AND COMPLETION DATES The work under the proposed contract shall be commenced within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and all items shall be completed on or before the 30th of June, 2017. 7 NOTICE TO BIDDERS METHOD OF PAYMENT TO CONTRACTOR The Contractor will be paid against bi-monthly estimates in cash on the basis of ninety-five percent (95%) of the work as it is completed and materials delivered and work approved. Final payment will be made thirty-one (31) days after completion of the work and acceptance by the Council. Before final payment is made, vouchers showing that all subcontractors and workmen and all persons furnishing materials have been fully paid for such materials and labor will be required unless the City is satisfied that material, men and laborers have been paid. The Contractor is hereby notified that if the City does not have cash on hand to pay monthly pay estimates, according to Chapter 384.57 of the Code of Iowa, payment may be made by anticipatory warrants issued bearing a rate of interest not exceeding that permitted by Chapter 74A, Code of Iowa. PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS Plans and Specifications governing the construction of the proposed improvements have been prepared by Robinson Engineering Company which plans and specifications and also the prior proceedings of the City Council referring to and defining said proposed improvements are hereby made a part of this notice, and the proposed contract by reference shall be executed in compliance therewith. Plans and Specifications are available from City of Waterloo Engineering Office upon the receipt of a $25.00 refundable deposit. Deposits will be refunded if the plans are returned in usable condition (i.e. generally free of highlights, ink markings, tears, stickers, water stains and soiling) to the Robinson Engineering_by the end of the 14th consecutive day after the project has been awarded. No deposits will be refunded for any requests or plans received after the 14th consecutive day, which includes plans returned via mail service. Plan holders are responsible for ascertaining when the project has been awarded. If the plan holder is the prime contractor or a subcontractor or supplier of the prime contractor that has been awarded the project, Plans and Specifications do not need to be returned to receive the deposit. The prime contractor must submit a list of his subcontractors and suppliers for Robinson Engineering Company_to verify eligibility for the refundable deposit. Upon award of project, the prime contractor, his subcontractors and suppliers shall be supplied with the needed number of plans and specifications at no additional cost. CONTRACT AWARD A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest bid. The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, re-advertise for new bids, and to waive informalities in the bids submitted that might be in the best interest of the City. 8 NOTICE TO BIDDERS Bids may be held by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a period not to exceed thirty (30) days from the day of the opening of bids for the purpose of reviewing the bids and investigating the qualifications of bidders, prior to awarding the contract. By virtue of statutory authority, a preference will be given to products and provisions grown and coal produced with the State of Iowa and preference will be given to local domestic labor in the construction of the improvement. PROPOSALS SUBMITTED The bidder shall submit bids on the items listed in the proposal. The bidder shall clearly write or type the unit bid price and the bid item extension (Unit Price x Estimated Qty) in numerals on the blanks provided. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price and extension, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price as being the valid unit bid price. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spreadsheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s) provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond, (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bonds, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the Bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. PERFORMANCE & PAYMENT BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a "Performance Bond" and a "Payment Bond" within ten (10) days after forms are presented to him in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the contract price, said bond to be issued by a responsible surety approved by the City Council and shall guarantee the faithful performance of the contract and the terms and conditions therein contained, and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all materials and labor and protect and save harmless the City from claims of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor. 9 NOTICE TO BIDDERS MAINTENANCE BOND Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive final payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM/SUBCONTRACTING The program proposes numerical projections regarding utilization of Minority Business Enterprise (MBE) and Women Business Enterprise (WBE) as Subcontractors, vendors and suppliers in the performance of Contracts awarded by the City of Waterloo, Iowa. A goal of at least ten percent (10%) for MBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. A goal of at least two percent (2%) for WBE participation on all City funded construction projects that are estimated at $50,000.00 or more. Any project funded in part or in total with federal funds shall follow the respective agencies contract compliance program and goals. The Prime Contractor shall make "good-faith efforts" to meet the Contract Compliance MBE/WBE goals. The MBE/WBE subcontractors, suppliers or vendors must provide the Prime Contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the Contractor is not required to accept their bid. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES Time is an essential element of this contract. It is important that the work be diligently pursued to completion. If the work is not completed within the specified contract period, plus authorized extensions, the contractor shall pay to the City Liquidated Damages in the amount of one thousand dollars ($1000.00) per day, for each day, as further described herein, in excess of the authorized time. Days beyond the specified completion date for which Liquidated Damages will be charged will be working days that the contractor does, or could have worked, from Monday through Saturday. Sundays will be counted only if work is performed. Partial working days will be considered as a full working day. Days not chargeable for Liquidated Damages will include rain days, Sunday if no work is done, and legal holidays. Working days will cease to be charged when only punch list items remain to be completed. Punch list items do not include contract bid items or approved change/extra work orders. When the Contractor believes the project to be substantially completed, a written notice stating the same shall be submitted to the Engineer and a request made for a Punch List. If the work under the Contract extends beyond the normal construction season for 10 NOTICE TO BIDDERS equest that such wo rk the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer in wrugdar the following working days counted toward the project be suspended until work is resumed season. This amou nt is not construed as a penalty. These damages are for the cost to the City of providing providing the required additional inspection, engineering and contract administration. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ose of Before the work is commenced on this contract, bythe prime contractor,subcrence shll be held for he pontractors discussing the contract. The conference shall be attended and City Officials. RESIDENT BIDDER/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER Atten tion of bidders is called to compliance with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non- Resident Bidder requirements. he Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include wish t ein bid, a Resident Bidder Certification or allon-Resident Bidder Certification in the form( ed. SALES TAX EXEMPTION CERTIFICATES Con tractors and approved subcontractors will be provided a Sales s Tax Exemption Cct ific cation the to purchase building materials or supplies in the performance City of Waterloo. Posted pursuant to the provisions of Chapter 26 of the City Code of Iowa. CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA 11 NOTICE TO BIDDERS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 1. EXPLANATIONS TO BIDDERS Any explanation desired by a bidder regarding the meaning or interpretation of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., must be requested in writing and with sufficient time allowed for a reply to reach bidders before submission of their bids. Any interpretation made will be in the form of an amendment of the Notice to Bidders, Plans, Specifications, etc., and will be furnished to all prospective bidders. Its receipt by the bidder must be acknowledged in the space provided on the Proposal Form or by letter or telegram received before the time set for opening of bids. Oral explanations or instructions given before the award of the contract will not be binding. 2. EXAMINATION OF PROPOSED WORK Bidders should visit the site and take such other steps as may be reasonably necessary to ascertain the nature and location of the work, and the general and local conditions which can affect the work or the cost thereof Failure to do so will not relieve bidders from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the work. The owner will assume no responsibility for any understanding or representation concerning conditions made by any of its officers or agents prior to the execution of the contract, unless included in the Notice to Bidders, the Specifications or related documents. 3. PREPARATION OF BIDS a. Bids shall be submitted on the forms furnished, or copies thereof, and must be manually signed. If erasures or other changes appear on the forms, each erasure or change must be initialed by the person signing the bid. The bidder has the option to submit a computer-generated spreadsheet in lieu of the portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal, which includes the Bid Item Number, Description, Unit, Estimated Quantity, Unit Bid Price, Total Bid Price, and Total Bid. The computer-generated spreadsheet shall include all of the information listed in that portion of the Form of Bid or Proposal as well as bear the signature of the Prime Contractor submitting the bid. For the bidders who submit a computer-generated spread- sheet, the TOTAL BID (with alternates, if applicable) shall also be indicated in the space(s)provided on the Form of Bid or Proposal. b. The Bid Form may provide for submission of a price or prices for one or more items, which may be lump sum bids, alternate prices, schedule items resulting in a bid on a unit of construction or a combination thereof, etc. When the Bid Form explicitly requires that the bidder bid on all items, failure to do so will disqualify the bid. When submission of a price on all items is not required, bidders should insert the words "no bid" in the space provided for any item on which no price is 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS submitted. c. Unless called for, alternate bids will not be considered. d. Modifications of bids already submitted will be considered if received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders by the time set for closing of bids. Telegraphic modifications will be considered, but should not reveal the amount of the original or revised bid. e. In preparing his bid, the bidder shall specify the price, written legibly in ink or with the typewriter, at which he proposes to do each item of work. The unit price shall be stated in figures in the blank space provided (i.e., $7.14). In items where unit price is required, the total amount of each item shall be computed at the unit prices bid for the quantities given on the Bid Form and stated in figures in the blank space provided. If the bidder chooses to submit the unit prices, total bid price, and total bid on a computer-generated spreadsheet, all numbers shall be easily legible. f. Any changes or alterations made in the Bid Form, or any addition thereto, may cause the rejection of the bid. No bid will be considered which contains a clause in which the contractor reserves the right to accept or reject a contract awarded him by the city Council of Waterloo. Bids in which the unit prices are obviously unbalanced may be rejected. g. If the bidder does not qualify as a resident bidder, the nonresident bidder shall specify on the "Non-Resident Bidder Certification" form whether any preference to resident bidders, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country is in effect in the nonresident bidder's state or country of domicile at the time of a bid submittal. 4. SUBMISSION OF BIDS a. A bid must be sealed in a separate envelope and marked to indicate its contents and be accompanied by the bid security in a separate envelope. If forwarded by mail, the two envelopes shall be placed in a third and mailed to the City Clerk/Auditor. All bids must be filed with the City Clerk/Auditor of the City of Waterloo at his office in the City Hall before the time specified for closing bids. b. Bids received prior to the advertised hour of opening will be securely kept sealed. The officer whose duty it is to open them will decide when the specified time has arrived, and no bid received thereafter will be considered; except that when a bid arrives by mail after the time fixed for opening, but before the reading of all other bids is completed, and it is shown to the satisfaction of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the non-arrival on time was due solely to delay in the mails for which 14 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS the bidder was not responsible, such bid will be received and considered. c. Bidders are cautioned that, while telegraphic modifications of bids may be received as provided above, such modifications, if not explicit and if in any sense subject to misinterpretation, shall made the bid so modified or amended, subject to rejection. 5. LATE BIDS AND MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWALS Bids and modifications or withdrawals thereof received at the office designated in the Notice to Bidders after the exact time set for closing of bids will not be considered. However, a modification which is received from an otherwise successful bidder, and which makes the terms of the bid more favorable to the City of Waterloo, will be considered at any time it is received and may therefore be accepted. Bids may be withdrawn by written or telegraphic request received from bidders prior to the time set for closing of bids. 6. PUBLIC OPENING OF BIDS Bids will be publicly opened at that time and place set for opening in the Notice to Bidders. Their content will be made public for the information of bidders and others interested who may be present either in person or by representative. 7. BID SECURITY REQUIRED All bids must be accompanied in a separate envelope by a certified or cashier's check drawn on an Iowa bank, or a bank chartered under the laws of the United States, a certified share draft drawn on a credit union in Iowa or chartered under the laws of the United States, or bid bond (on the form furnished by the City) payable to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in the sum of not less than five percent (5%) of the bid submitted, which certified check, certified share draft or bid bond will be held as security that the Bidder will enter into a Contract for the construction of the work and will furnish the required bonds, and in case the successful Bidder shall fail or refuse to enter into the Contract and furnish the required bond, his bid security may be retained by said City as agreed upon liquidated damages. If bid bond is used, it must be signed by both the bidder and the surety or surety's agent. Signature of surety's agent must be supported by accompanying Power of Attorney. 8. COLLUSIVE AGREEMENTS a. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Non- Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he as not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. b. Each bidder submitting a bid shall have each proposed subcontractor, if any, 15 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS execute and submit to the City Contract Compliance Officer by 5:00 P.M. the business day following the day bids on this project are due, a Non-Collusion Affidavit in the form herein provided, to the effect that he has not colluded with any other person, firm, or corporation in regard to any bid submitted. Before executing any subcontract, the successful bidder shall submit the name of any proposed subcontractor for approval by the City. 9. MINORITY AND/OR WOMEN AND/OR SECTION 3 BUSINESS ENTERPRISE SUBCONTRACTORS a. CITY OF WATERLOO AND/OR WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE PRE- BID CONTACT INFORMATION FORM The City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women and/or Section 3 Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form shall be submitted with the Form of Bid or Proposal. Failure to do so shall be grounds for the bid being rejected if subcontracting is proposed by the prime contractor. 10. MBE/WBE/SECTION3 CONTRACT COMPLIANCE PROGRAM PURPOSE The purpose of the Contract Compliance Program (hereinafter called Program) is to act as an impetus for increasing the participation of minority and women disadvantaged business enterprise (MBE/WBE/Section3) in City awarded construction contracts. The Program does not propose to eliminate any bonafide contractor or subcontractor from bidding on City contracts, but it will hopefully serve as a needed stimulus to help local MBE/WBE/Section3's grow and eventually become mainstream contractors and subcontractors. This Contract Compliance Program does not propose to include any set-aside or quotas, but only flexible goals where "good-faith efforts" are required by the contractor to use MBE/WBE/Section3 subcontractors. This Program shall not eliminate the need for contractors to continue their "good- faith efforts" in using MBE/WBE/Section3 subcontractors on City contracts estimated at less than$50,000. The City of Waterloo will make every effort to reduce in-house construction and maintenance work that would be more cost effectively performed by the private sector and, thus, would allow additional bidding opportunities for MBE/WBE/Section3 firms. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall be advised of all City of Waterloo 16 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Contract Compliance MBE/WBE/Section3 goals. The MBE/WBE/Section3 subcontracts must provide the prime contractor a reasonably competitive price for the service being rendered or the contractor is not required to accept the bid. Administrative Reconsideration: As part of this reconsideration,the bidder will have the opportunity to provide written documentation or arguments concerning the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts to meet the goals. The bidder will have the opportunity to meet in person with the City of Waterloo's Administrative Reconsideration Committee to discuss the issue of whether they made adequate good faith efforts. The Administrative Reconsideration Committee will forward a written decision on reconsideration to the Mayor and City Council, explaining the basis for finding that the bidder did or did not meet the goal or make adequate good faith efforts to do so. Documentation required will include but is not limited to the following: * Making portions of the work available for MBE/WBE/Section 3 subcontracting * Evidence of negotiating with MBE/WBE/Section 3 firms * MBE/WBE/Section 3 quotes obtained and non-MBE/WBE/Section 3 quotes used * Reasons agreements were not reached * Follow-up after initial solicitations * Efforts to assist in obtaining equipment, supplies and materials (at competitive prices), bonding, lines of credit, insurance, etc. * Evidence of past compliance or non-compliance by same contractor The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation)based on overall program goals. RESPONSIBILITIES 1. City of Waterloo A. The City Contract Compliance Officer has the responsibility to assure the City's compliance with Federal, State and Municipal regulations. B. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for maintaining a current directory of certified firms. Certification of MBE/WBE/DBE contractors is through the Iowa Department of Transportation and its Unified Certification Program. Only firms certified based on guidelines prescribed in 49 CFR Part 26 and provisions of this agreement, shall be recognized as certified by the City of Waterloo. C. The City Contract Compliance Officer is responsible for making available a list of future project information notices to MBE/WBE/Section 3 firms. 19 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS D. The City Contract Compliance Officer shall send notices to appropriate MBE/WBE/Section 3 firms in the directory of each bid solicitation with opening date. E. The City Contract Compliance Officer will receive MBE/WBE/Section 3 Letter(s) of Intent to Bid and within two (2)business days forward the complete list of MBE/WBE/Section 3 bidders who submitted a Letter of Intent to Bid to prime contractors. II. Prime Contractors In order to be in compliance with the guidelines of this program, the prime contractor must show good-faith efforts in following the MBE/WBE/Section 3 Contract Compliance Program. Good-faith efforts include, but are not limited to, the following: A. Prime contractors shall send solicitation letters (Form CCO-3)to appropriate MBE/WBE/Section 3 (those certified in directory prepared by City Contract Compliance Officer) at least seven (7)working days prior to bid date. Letters should identify specific items to be subcontracted. A minimum of three (3) disadvantaged business contacts must be made and documented, if there are at least three disadvantaged businesses offering services in the area to be subcontracted (See City of Waterloo MBE/WBE Certification List). If less than three (3) are offering the services to be subcontracted, then a contact is required for any that are listed as providing that service. If the Prime Contractor submits a MBE/WBE/Section 3 contact not on the City's MBE/WBE list, attach a copy of the MBE/WBE/DBE/Section 3 Certifications from another government agency. B. If a prime contract bidder is unable to identify MBE/WBE/Section 3 firms to perform portions of the work, the City Contract Compliance Officer should be contacted for assistance immediately. C. Prime contract bidders may solicit MBE/WBE/Section 3 proposals by telephone or personal interviews, but all such contacts shall be confirmed by Certified Mail, or subcontract bid request forms (Form CCO-2). D. If any MBE/WBE/Section 3 business submitting bids is not selected for subcontract award, documentation must accompany the "MBE/WBE/Section 3 Business Enterprise Pre-Bid Contact Information Form" (Form CCO-4 and CCO-4A) on why the MBE/WBE/Section 3 was not selected. These reasons could include: a. Not low bid. Copies of the competing bids may be required for verification. b. MBE/WBE/Section 3 did not bid, withdrew bid or non-responsive. 20 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS c. Documentation of other business-related reason for not selecting the MBE/WBE/Section 3 business for a subcontract. d. Prime contractor self performs work. e. Any other reason relied on by prime. The Contract Compliance Officer will determine the weight to be given to each item listed above (supported by appropriate documentation) based on overall program goals. MBE/WBE Firms A. MBE/WBE firms shall be certified by the Iowa Department of Transportation as owners and controllers of their respective businesses, or were listed on the City of Waterloo Certified MBE/WBE Contractors list as of July 1, 2002. B. MBE/WBE/Section 3 firms must perform the work on the project; they cannot act as a broker by subcontracting the work out to others. C. Each MBE/WBE/Section 3 firm planning to submit quotes on construction projects with goals, shall submit a Letter of Intent to Bid (Form CCO-5)to the City Contract Compliance Officer seven(7) working days prior to bid opening, listing specific items which the MBE/WBE/Section 3 firm is interested in bidding. If sufficient Letters of Intent to Bid are not received by the City Contract Compliance Officer seven(7) working days prior to bid opening, goals on subject project will be reduced accordingly. Agreements between the bidder/proposer and a MBE/WBE/Section 3 in which the MBE/WBE/Section 3 promises not to provide subcontracting quotations to other bidders/proposers are prohibited. NON-COMPLIANCE OF CONTRACTORS A. Noncompliance exists when the contractor's actions are not consistent with the requirements of the Contract Compliance Program in the areas of employment and subcontracting. B. A bidder's failure to show good-faith efforts to meet project goals or a failure to use certified MBE/WBE/Section 3 firms may be grounds for finding its bid not responsible. C. The Contract Compliance Officer shall submit to City Council his/her recommendation on any non-compliant contract in writing. NOTICE TO PROCEED Notice to proceed on any project with goals will not be issued until City Contract Compliance Officer determines the lowest responsible bidder has used good-faith efforts to comply with this Compliance Program and the bid was responsive. 21 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS CONCLUSION This program repeals or revises all sections of previous Waterloo Contract Compliance Programs. 11. EMPLOYMENT AND BUSINESS OPPORTUNITY To the greatest extent feasible, suppliers, subcontractors, and low income workers owning businesses or living in the Waterloo area must be given priority in supplying materials, bidding for subcontract work, or applying for employment by the contractor on this project. Opportunities for training and for employment arising in connection with this project, shall to the greatest extent feasible be made available to lower income persons residing in the project area. The contract area is the City of Waterloo. The City of Waterloo will require the contractor to document his efforts in securing lower income workers living in the project area and in purchasing supplies from, and awarding subcontracts to, businesses owned by persons residing in the project area. 12. STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS Each bidder shall, upon request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, submit on the form furnished for that purpose (a copy of which is included in the contract documents), a statement of bidder's qualifications, his experience record in constructing the type of improvements embraced, and his organization and equipment available for the work contemplated; and, when specifically requested, a detailed financial statement. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, shall have the right to take such steps as it deems necessary to determine the ability of the bidder to perform his obligations under the contract, and the bidder shall furnish the City of Waterloo, Iowa, all such information and data for this purpose as it may request. The right is reserved to reject any bid where an investigation of the available evidence or information does not satisfy the City of Waterloo, Iowa, that the bidder is qualified to carry out properly the terms of the contract. 13. AWARD OF CONTRACT a. Award of contract will be made to that responsive and responsible bidder whose bid, conforming to the Specifications, is most advantageous to the City of Waterloo; price and other factors considered. The intention is to award the contract at any time of opening bids, but the right is reserved to postpone such action for a reasonable time,not exceeding thirty (30) days. b. The City Council may, when in its interest, reject any or all bids or waive any informality in bids received. c. The bidder shall submit bids on all the items listed in the proposal and shall state the unit bid price in words in the blank spaces provided beneath the item 22 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS description. Should there be any discrepancy between the unit bid price in words and listed numeral unit bid price, the City of Waterloo shall consider the unit bid price in words as being the valid unit bid price. A computer-generated spreadsheet as herein provided shall also be acceptable. Proposals requiring mathematical computations to determine unit prices or totals will be rejected. A contract will be awarded to the qualified bidder submitting the lowest total bid as indicated in the NOTICE TO BIDDERS. d. When a contract for a public improvement is to be awarded to the lowest responsive and responsible bidder, a resident bidder shall be allowed a preference as against a nonresident bidder from a state or foreign country if that state or foreign country gives or requires any preference to bidders from that state or foreign country, including but not limited to any preference to bidders, the imposition of any type of labor force preference, or any other form of preferential treatment to bidders or laborers from that state or foreign country. The preference allowed shall be equal to the preference given or required by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. In the instance of a resident labor force preference, a nonresident bidder shall apply the same resident labor force preference to a public improvement in this state as would be required in the construction of a public improvement by the state or foreign country in which the nonresident bidder is a resident. 14. EXECUTION OF AGREEMENT, BONDS, AND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE a. Subsequent to the award and within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, the successful bidder shall execute and deliver to the City of Waterloo, Iowa, an agreement in the form included in the contract documents in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may require. b. Having satisfied all conditions of award as set forth elsewhere in these documents, the successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a surety bond and a payment bond in a penal sum not less than the amount of the contract as awarded, as security for the faithful performance of the contract and terms and conditions therein contained and shall guarantee the prompt payment of all persons, firms, or corporations to whom the contractor may become legally indebted for labor, materials, tools, equipment, or services of any nature including utility and transportation services, employed or used by him in performing the work. The bonds shall protect and save harmless the City from claims and damages of any kind caused by the operations of the contractor and shall also guarantee the maintenance of the contract improvements for the period stated in the Notice of Hearing from and after completion of said improvements and their acceptance by the City. Such bonds shall be in the same form as that included in the contract documents and shall bear the same date as, or a date subsequent to that of the agreement. The current Power of Attorney for the person who signs for any surety company shall be attached to such bonds. 23 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS c. The successful bidder shall, within the period specified in paragraph "a" above, furnish a certificate of insurance for approval in amounts of not less than the amounts specified in the General Specifications for Construction, Section F. No. 4 "Liability Insurance," Pages 14 to 15 of 19 Pages. The certificate of insurance shall be furnished in such number of copies as the City of Waterloo may require. The City of Waterloo shall be named as an "Additional Insured." The contractor shall similarly submit his subcontractor's certificates of insurance in the amounts for approval before each commences work. The contractor shall carry or require that there be Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all his employees and those of his subcontractors engaged in work at the site, in accordance with State Workmen's Compensation Laws. d. The failure of the successful bidder to execute such agreement and to supply the required bond or bonds within ten (10) days after the prescribed forms are presented for signature, or within such extended period as the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may grant, based upon reasons determined sufficient by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, may either award the contract to the next lowest bidder or re- advertise for bids, and may charge against the bidder the difference between the amount of the bid an the amount for which a contract for the work is subsequently executed, irrespective of whether the amount thus due exceeds the amount of the bid guaranty. If a more favorable bid is received by re-advertising, the defaulting bidder shall have no claim against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, for a refund. 15. RESIDENT BIDDER/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER PREFERENCE Attention of bidders is called to compliance with the provisions of the Resident Bidder/Non-Resident Bidder requirement. Each bidder submitting a bid shall execute and include with the bid, a Resident Bidder Certification or a Non-Resident Bidder Certification in the form(s)herein provided. 24 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL FY 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA Honorable Mayor and City Council Waterloo, Iowa Gentlemen: 1. The undersigned, being a Corporation existing under the laws of the State of a Partnership consisting of the following partners: , having familiarized (himself) (themselves) (itself) with the existing conditions on the project area affecting the cost of the work, and with all the contract documents listed in the Table of Contents and Addenda (if any), as prepared by the City Engineer of the City of Waterloo now on file in the office of the City Clerk, City Hall, Waterloo, Iowa, hereby proposes to furnish all supervision, technical personnel, labor, materials, machinery, tools, appurtenances, equipment, and services, including utility and transportation services required to construct and complete this FY 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY, all in accordance with the above-listed documents and for the unit prices for work in place for the following items and quantities: FY 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY BID DESCRIPTION UNIT EST.QTY. UNIT BID TOTAL BID PRICE ITEM PRICE BASE BID 1 PAVEMENT REMOVAL SQ FT 5800 $ $ 2 EXCAVATION-PAVEMENT SUBBASE CU YDS 102.2 $ $ 3 EXCAVATION-PAVER ROCK CHAMBER CU YDS 456.8 $ $ 4 8"P.C.C.PAVEMENT SQ FT 3310 $ $ 5 PAVEMENT GRANULAR SUBBASE TONS 186.2 $ $ 6 INTAKE, SW-401 EACH 1 $ $ 7 INTAKE, SW-504(MODIFIED) EACH 1 $ $ 8 STRUCTURE ADJUSTMENTS EACH 7 $ $ 25 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 9 8"DIA. SUBDRAIN-SOLID LIN FT 20 $ $ 10 8"DIA. SUBDRAIN-SLOTTED LIN FT 100 $ $ 11 PAVER BORDER LIN FT 300 $ $ PERMEABLE GRAVEL BASE 12 (1"CLEAN STONE) TONS 86.4 $ $ PERMEABLE GRAVEL BASE 13 (3"CLEAN BASE) TONS 777.0 $ $ 14 PERMEABLE PAVERS SQ FT 2475.0 $ $ 15 GEOGRID-UNDER PAVERS SQ FT 2600 $ $ 16 GEOGRID-UNDER ROCK CHAMBER SQ FT 2480 $ $ 17 CHAMBER LINER(10' OF CHAMBER) SQ FT 280.0 $ $ LUMP 18 TRAFFIC CONTROL SUM 1.0 $ $ TOTAL BASE BID $ ALTERNATE NO. 1 ALT $ $ 1-1 CHAMBER LINER(ENTIRE CHAMBER) SQ FT 3850.0 ALT $ $ 1-2 8"DIA. SUBDRAIN-SOLID LIN FT 200.0 TOTAL BID ALTERNATE NO. 1 $ TOTAL BASE BID AND ALT. NO. 1 $ 2. It is understood that the quantities set forth are approximate only and subject to variation and that the unit bid price for the work done shall govern in the actual payment to Contractor. 3. In submitting this bid, the bidder understands that the right is reserved by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, to reject any or all bids. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed,telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within thirty(30)days after the opening thereof, or at any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned agrees to execute and deliver an agreement in the prescribed form and furnish the required bond and certificate of the insurance within ten (10) days after the agreement is presented to him for signature, and start work within ten(10)days after"Notice to Proceed" is issued. 26 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 4. Security in the sum of Dollars ($ )in the form of , is submitted herewith in accordance with the INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. 5. Attached hereto is a Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Contractor. 6. Attached hereto is a Resident Bidder Certification ( ), or Non-Resident Bidder Certification( ). (Mark one.) 7. The bidder is prepared to submit a financial and experience statement upon request. 8. The Prime Contractor and Subcontractor(s), which have performed an aggregate of $10,000.00 in work for the City in the current calendar year, are prepared to submit an AAP or Update and an EOC, within ten (10) days of notification that the bid submitted is lowest and acceptable. 9. The bidder has received the following Addendum or Addenda: Addendum No. Date 10. The bidder shall list the MBE/WBE/Section 3 subcontractor(s), amount of subcontracts and bid items on the City of Waterloo Minority and/or Women and/or Section 3 Business Pre- bid Contact Information Form submitted with this Form of Bid or Proposal. The apparent low Bidder shall submit a list of all other Subcontractor(s) to be used on this Project to the City of Waterloo by 5:00 p.m. the business day following the day Bids on this Project are due along with the Non-Collusion Affidavits of All Subcontractor(s). The Contractor shall submit information on subcontractors on "SUBCONTRACTOR REQUEST AND APPROVAL"Form to be provided by City prior to approval of contract. The subcontractors listed on this proposal and/or submitted to the Contract Compliance Officer cannot be changed except for the following reasons: 1) The City of Waterloo does not approve the subcontractors. 2) The subcontractors submit in writing that they cannot fulfill their subcontracts. 11. The bidder has filled in all blanks on this proposal. Those blanks not applicable are marked "none" or"NA". 12. The bidder has attached all applicable forms. 27 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL 13. The Owner reserves the right to select alternates, delete line items, and/or to reduce quantities prior to the award of a contract due to budgetary limitations. (Name of Bidder) (Date) BY: Title Official Address: (Including Zip Code): I.R.S.No. 28 FORM OF BID OR PROPOSAL NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER State of ) )ss County of ) ,being first duly sworn,deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner,Partner,Officer,Representative,or Agent) ,of ,the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid; 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid; 3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid; 4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant,has in any way colluded,conspired,connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other Bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or, to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other Bidder, or to secure through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance, or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo,Iowa,or any person interested in the Proposed Contract;and 5. The price or prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its agents, representatives,owners,employees,or parties in interest,including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ,201_. Title My commission expires 31 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR State of ) ) ss: County of ) ,being first duly sworn,deposes and says that: 1. He is (Owner,Partner,Officer,Representative, or Agent) ,of hereinafter referred to as the "Subcontractor;" 2. He is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the subcontractor's proposal submitted by the subcontractor to , contract pertaining to the project in • (City or County and State) 3. Such subcontractor's proposal is genuine and is not a collusive or sham proposal; 4. Neither the subcontractor nor any of its officers, partners, owners, agents, representatives, employees, or parties in interest, including this affiant, has in any way colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other bidder, firm or person to submit a collusive or sham proposal in connection with such contract or to refrain from submitting a proposal in connection with such contract, or has in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by unlawful agreement or connivance with any other bidder, firm or person to fix the price or prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of the price of prices in said subcontractor's proposal, or to secure through collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement any advantage against the City of Waterloo, Iowa, or any person interested in the proposed contract;and 5. The price or prices quoted in the subcontractor's proposal are fair and proper and are not tainted by any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the bidder or any of its agents, representatives,owners,employees,or parties in interest,including this affiant. (Signed) Title Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of ,201 . Title My commission expires 32 NON-COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT OF SUBCONTRACTOR BIDDER EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE (As provided in Executive Order No. 11246) All contractors, subcontractors, vendors and suppliers of goods and services doing business with the City and value of said business equals or exceeds ten thousand dollars ($10,000.00) annually agree as follows: 1. The contractors, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap, political opinions or affiliations. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will develop an Affirmative Action program to ensure that applicants are employed and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disability, political opinions or affiliations. Such actions shall include but not be limited to the following: a. Employment b. Upgrading c. Demotion or Transfer d. Recruitment and Advertising e. Layoff or Termination f. Rates of Pay or Other Forms of Compensation g. Selection for Training Including Apprenticeship 2. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees, state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, religion, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities, political opinion or affiliations. 3. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier or his/her collective bargaining representative will send to each labor union or representative of workers which he/she has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice advising said labor union or workers' representative of the contractor's commitment under this section. 4. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will comply with all published rules, regulations, directives, and order of the City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Program Contract Compliance Provisions. 5. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will furnish and file compliance reports within such time and upon such forms as provided by the Affirmative Action Officer. Said forms will elicit information as to the policies, procedures, patterns, and practices of each subcontractor as well as the contractor 33 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE himself/herself and said contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier will permit access to his/her employment books, records and accounts to the City's Affirmative Action Officer, for the purpose of investigation to ascertain compliance with this contract and with rules and regulations of the City's Affirmative Action Program—Contract Compliance Provisions relative to Resolution No. 24664. 6. In the event of the contractor's non-compliance with the non-discrimination clauses of this contract or with any of such rules, regulations and orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further contracts in accordance with procedures authorized by the City Council. 7. The contractor, subcontractor, vendor and supplier of goods and services will include, or incorporate by reference, the provisions of the non-discrimination clause in every contract, subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by the rules, regulations or orders of the City's Affirmative Action Program, and will provide in every subcontract, or purchase order that said provisions will be binding upon each contractor, subcontractor, or supplier. 8. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to non- discrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical disabilities. (Signed) (Appropriate Official) (Title) (Date) 34 EQUAL OPPORTUNITY CLAUSE TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS During the performance of this contract, the contractor(for itself), its assignees, and successors in interest(hereinafter referred to as the "contractor") agrees as follows: 1. Compliance with Regulations: The contractor shall comply with the Regulations relative to non-discrimination in Federally assisted programs of the DOT Title 49, Code of Federal Regulations, Part 21, as they may be amended from time to time, (hereinafter referred to as the Regulations), which are herein incorporated by reference and made a part of this contract. 2. Nondiscrimination: The contractor, with regard to the work performed by it during the contract, shall not discriminate on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability in the selection and retention of subcontractors, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment. The contractor shall not participate either directly or indirectly in the discrimination prohibited by section 21.5 of the Regulations, including employment practices when the contract covers a program set forth in Appendix B of the Regulations. 3. Solicitations for Subcontracts, Including Procurement of Materials and Equipment: In all solicitations either by competitive bidding or negotiation made by the contractor for work to be performed under a subcontract, including procurement of materials or leases of equipment, each potential subcontractor or supplier shall be notified by the contractor of the contractor's obligations under this contract and the Regulations relative to non- discrimination on the grounds of race, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability. 4. Information and Reports: The contractor shall provide all information and reports required by the Regulations or directives issued pursuant there to, and shall allow access to its books, records, accounts, other sources of information, and its facilities as may be determined by the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or FHWA to be pertinent to ascertain compliance with such Regulations, orders and instructions. Where any information required of a contractor is in the exclusive possession of another who fails or refuses to furnish this information the contractor shall so certify to the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA as appropriate, and shall set forth what efforts it has made to obtain the information. 5. Sanctions for Noncompliance: In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination provisions of this contract, the Contracting Authority,the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA shall impose such contract sanctions as they may determine to be appropriate, including, but not limited to: a. Withholding of payments to the contractor under the contract until the contractor complies, and/or b. Cancellation, termination, or suspension of the contract, in whole or in part. 35 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS 6. Incorporation of Provisions: The contractor shall include the provisions of paragraphs (1) through(6) in every subcontract, including procurement of materials and leases of equipment, unless exempt by the Regulations, or directives issued pursuant thereto. The contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract or procurement as the Contracting Authority, the Iowa DOT, or the FHWA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions including sanctions for non-compliance: Provided, however, that, in the event of a contractor becomes involved in, or it threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or supplier as a result of such direction, the contractor may request the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the Contracting Authority or the Iowa DOT; and, in addition, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interest of the United States. 36 TITLE VI CIVIL RIGHTS RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER RESIDENT BIDDER: In accordance with Section 73A.21 of the Iowa Code, all non-federal-aid public improvement projects, which include road construction, shall be performed by a qualified resident bidder. The resident bidder has been further defined as follows: Resident Bidder: A person or entity authorized to transact business in this state and having a business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country. The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a qualified resident bidder according to the above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of"Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents. If it is determined that the contractor does not meet this qualification after he begins work, a shutdown notice shall be issued and the voiding of the contract shall begin unless the contractor becomes qualified. NON-RESIDENT BIDDER: The contractor shall provide the City with a certification that he is a non-resident bidder according to the above definition. The Certification shall be submitted with the contractor's bid. A copy of the form of"Non-Resident Bidder Certification" is included in the Contract Documents. DJG 01/02/12 37 RESIDENT/NON-RESIDENT BIDDER RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION CONTRACT NO: PROJECT NAME: DATE OF LETTING: To be a qualified resident bidder, the bidder shall be a person or entity authorized to transact business in this state and having a business for at least three years prior to the date of the first advertisement for the public improvement. If another state or foreign country has a more stringent definition of a resident bidder, the more stringent definition is applicable as to bidders from that state or foreign country. This qualification as resident bidder shall be maintained by the contractor and his subcontractors at the work site until this project is completed. I hereby certify that I am a resident bidder as defined above. COMPANY NAME CORPORATE OFFICER TITLE DATE 38 RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION NON-RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION CONTRACT NO.: PROJECT NAME: DATE OF LETTING: I hereby certify that I am an Iowa non-resident bidder. COMPANY NAME: CORPORATE OFFICER: TITLE: DATE: STATE/COUNTRY OF RESIDENCY: Stated below are the preference(s) to resident bidders in the state/country of • (Preference to bidders, labor force, or other preferential treatment to bidders or laborers, etc. 39 NON=RESIDENT BIDDER CERTIFICATION Revised February 2003 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION PROGRAM Check box that applies to party completing program: ( ) General Contractor ( ) Subcontractor Section A to be completed by GENERAL CONTRACTORS only: A. Name of Company Address of Company Zip Telephone Number( ) Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number, Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer Name of Project Project Contract Number Estimated Construction Work Dates / Start Finish Section B to be completed by SUBCONTRACTORS only: B. Name of General or Prime Contractor Name of Subcontractor Subcontractor's Address Zip Subcontractor's Telephone Number( ) Subcontractor's Federal ID Number(if no Federal ID Number Owner/President's Social Security Number) Name of Equal Employment Officer 41 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION C. Remainder of program to be completed by party completing program, either Prime or Subcontractor. 1. The Owners and/or Principals of your company: Ethnic Name Address Position Sex Origin 2. Other Areas of Interest: If your company has branches or subsidiaries, or if your company is a branch or subsidiary of a parent organization, give the following information: Type of Name Address Affiliation Degree II. EMPLOYER'S POLICY (Please read carefully.) A. We, the undersigned, recognize that we are morally and legally committed to nondiscrimination in employment. Any person who applies for employment with our company will not be discriminated against because of race, color, creed, sex, national origin, economic status, age, mental or physical handicap. B. The employment policies and practices of the undersigned are to recruit and hire employees without discrimination, and to treat them equally with respect to compensation and opportunities for advancement, including training, upgrading, promotion, and transfer. However, we realize the inequities associated with employment training, upgrading, contracting and subcontracting for minorities and women and we will direct our efforts to correcting any deficiencies to the maximum extent possible. The same will be required of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers. C. We submit this program to assure compliance with Executive Order 11246, as amended, and other subsequent orders that may pertain to equal employment opportunity and merit employment policies, fully realizing that our qualification and/or merit system should be evaluated and revised, if necessary. 42 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION D. We agree to put forth the maximum effort to achieve full employment and utilization of capabilities and productivity of all our citizens without regard to race, creed, color, sex, national origin, economic status, age, and mental or physical handicap. E. will give training (Name of Company) and employment opportunities to local residents of Waterloo, Iowa, to the greatest extent feasible. III. AFFIRMATIVE ACTION A. recognizes that the (Name of Company) effective application of a policy of merit employment involves more than just a policy statement, and (Name of Company) will, therefore, re-evaluate our Affirmative Action Program to ensure that equal employment opportunities are available on the basis of individual merit, and to actively encourage minorities, women and local residents to seek employment with our company on this basis. B. will undertake the (Name of Company) following six (6) steps to improve our Affirmative Action Program: 1. Minority Recruitment and Employment; 2. Local Recruitment and Employment; 3. Disabled Veteran and Vietnam Era Veteran Recruitment and Employment; 4. Handicapped Recruitment and Employment; 5. Female Recruitment and Employment; and 6. Training, Upgrading and Promotional Opportunities. C. will take (Name of Company) whatever steps are necessary to ensure that our total work force has adequate minority, female, and local representation. We will utilize the following methods in our recruitment attempts: 1. Local advertising media(newspapers, radio, TV); 2. Community organizations (churches, clubs, schools); 3. Public and private institutions in the area (UNI, Hawkeye Community College); 4. Job Service of Iowa; and 5. Other. D. will seek qualified minority, (Name of Company) 43 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION female, and local group applicants for all job categories and will make asserted efforts to increase minority, female and group representation in occupations at the higher levels or skill and responsibility. E. All sources of employment used shall be aware that we are an Equal Employment Opportunity Employer. Labor organizations representing our employees will be notified of our Equal Employment Opportunity Policy and Affirmative Action Program. F. Training, upgrading, promotion and transfer activities at all levels will be monitored to ensure that full consideration has been given to qualified minority, female, and local group employees. G. will encourage other (Name of Company) companies with whom we are associated and/or do business, to do the same and we will assist them in their efforts. H. has taken the following (Name of Company) Affirmative Action to ensure that minority, female, local contractors and/or suppliers were provided opportunities to negotiate and/or bid on this project: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. As a result of the above efforts, we have involved minority, female, and local contractors and/or suppliers in the following areas of subcontracting: (if none, write "NONE") 1. 2. J. will require approved (Name of Company) Affirmative Action Programs from all nonexempt contractors who propose to work on this project and will take whatever steps are necessary to ensure that non- minority contractors have adequate representation of minority, female and local persons in their total work force. K. In further accordance with rules and guidelines issued pursuant to Executive Order 11246 as amended, we establish the goals for our company, based on parity 44 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION percentages supplied by the City, and we realize these goals will be reviewed on an annual basis. L. will keep records of (Name of Company) specific actions relative to recruitment, employment, training, upgrading and promotion and will provide the City of Waterloo with any information relative to same, including activities of our SUBCONTRACTORS and suppliers as necessary or when requested. M. Parity figures for companies located in Waterloo are as follows: Minority Parity= .08 (8%) N. Affirmative Action (Name of Company) Employment Goals: The definition of Affirmative Action Goals is as follows: "Goals may not be rigid and inflexible quotas which must be met, but must be targets, reasonably attainable by means of applying every good faith effort to make all aspects of the entire Affirmative Action Program work." For the year 201_, please submit percentage targets for employing minorities and women. If you already have reached your target for hiring minorities and women, please submit that percentage. *Goals for Minorities: Goals for Women: *Your affirmative action goals should be between 1% and 10% or more for minorities and 1% and 5% or more for women. Please be advised that the goals or targets are purely your estimation of how many women and minorities your company can reasonably expect to hire in 201_. Note, that none of the goals are rigid or inflexible. They are targets that your company calculates as reasonably attainable. This will help the City in its monitoring procedures as required by City of Waterloo Resolution No. 1984- 142(4). 45 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION CONTRACTOR'S TOTAL WORK FORCE (WATERLOO) HOURLY NAME AND ADDRESS JOB CATEGORY RACE SEX WAGE INDICATE: DISABLED VETERAN: DV VIETNAM ERA VETERAN: VV HANDICAPPED: H We hereby certify that we are in compliance with all City and Federal Affirmative Action Regulations and agree to accept all liability for failure to comply. 46 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION Respectfully submitted, By: Company Executive Date By: Equal Employment Opportunity Officer Date City of Waterloo Affirmative Action Officer Approved Disapproved Reason: By: Date: 47 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION DESCRIPTION OF JOB CATEGORIES 1. Officials/Manager: Occupations in which employees set broad policies, exercise overall responsibility for execution of all policies, or direct individual departments or special phases of the agency's operations or provide specialized consultation on a regional, district or area basis. Includes: department heads, bureau chiefs, division chiefs, directors, deputy directors, controllers, examiners, wardens, superintendents, unit supervisors, sheriffs, police and fire chiefs and inspectors and kindred workers. 2. Professionals: Occupations which require specialized and theoretical knowledge which is usually required through college training or thorough work experience and other training which provides comparable knowledge. Includes: personnel and labor relations workers, social workers, doctors, psychologists, registered nurses, economists, dietitians, lawyers, system analysts, accountants, engineers, employment and vocational rehabilitation counselors, teachers or instructors, police and fire captains and lieutenants and kindred workers. 3. Technicians: Occupations which require a combination of basic scientific or technical knowledge and manual skill which can be obtained through specialized post-secondary school education and through equivalent on-the-job training. Includes: computer programmers and operations, draftsmen, surveyors, licensed practical nurses, photographs, radio operators, technical illustrators, police and fire sergeants and kindred workers. 4. Office/Clerical: Workers are responsible for internal and external communication, recording and retrieval of data and/or information and other paper work required in an office. Includes: bookkeepers, messengers, office machine operators, clerk-typists, stenographers, court transcribers, hearing reporters, statistical clerks, dispatchers, license distributors, payroll clerks and kindred workers. 5. Skilled Craft Workers: Workers perform jobs which require special manual skill and a thorough and comprehensive knowledge of the processes involved in the work which is acquired through on-the-job training programs. Includes: Mechanics and repairman, electricians, heavy equipment operators, stationary engineers, skilled machine occupations, carpenters, compositors and typesetters and kindred workers. 6. Sales Workers: Occupations engaging wholly and primarily in direct selling. Includes: advertising agents and salesman, insurance agents and brokers, real estate agents and brokers, stock and bond salesmen, demonstrators, salesmen and sales clerks, grocery clerks and cashier checkers, and kindred workers. 7. Operatives (semi-skilled): Workers who operate machine or processing equipment or perform other factory-type duties of intermediate skill level which can be mastered in a few weeks and require only limited training. Includes: apprentices (auto mechanics), plumbers, building trades, metal working trades, bricklayers, carpenters, electricians, 49 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION machinists, mechanics, printing trades, etc., operatives, attendants (auto service and parking), plasterers, chauffeurs, deliverymen and furnacemen, heaters (metal), laundry and dry cleaning operatives, milliners, mine operatives and laborers, motormen, oilers and greasers, (except auto painters), (except construction and maintenance), photographic process workers, stationary fireman, truck and tractor drivers, weavers, (textile), welders and flame cutters and kindred workers. 8. Laborers (unskilled): Workers in manual occupations which generally require no special training. Perform elementary duties that may be learned in few days and require the application of little or no independent judgment. Includes: garage laborers, car washers and greasers, gardeners (except farm) and groundskeepers, longshoremen, and stevedores, lumbermen, raftsmen and woodchoppers, laborers performing lifing, digging, mixing, loading and pulling operations and kindred workers. 9. Apprentices: Persons employed in a program including work training and related instruction to learn a trade or craft which is traditionally an apprenticeship, regardless of whether the program is registered with a Federal or State agency. 10. Trainees (on-the-iob): Production. . . persons in formal training for craftsmen when not trained under apprentice programs--operative laborer, and service occupations. White Collar. . . persons engaged in formal training for clerical, managerial, professional, technical, sales, office and clerical occupations. 50 CONTRACTOR'S OR SUBCONTRACTOR'S AFFIRMATIVE ACTION ITEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 PARTICIPATION NOTICE TO PROSPECTIVE BIDDERS: The following are items from the FY 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY, that have a potential for MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 Participation. This listing, however, is not intended to be all encompassing; to preclude MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 Contractors from bidding on any items of the Proposal as a Subcontractor or the entire Proposal as a Prime Contractor. BID ITE TOTAL M DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY 1 Pavement Removal Sq Ft 5800 2 Excavation—Pavement Subbase Cu Yds 102.2 3 Excavation—Paver Rock Chamber Cu Yds 456.8 4 5 6 7 MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 GOALS FOR THIS PROJECT IMPORTANT: Prime Contract Bidders should be aware that ten percent (10%) MBE goal and a two percent (2%) WBE goal is attached to this project. "Certified Return Receipt" letters are no longer needed with the bid showing proof of contacting MBE or WBE Subcontractors, but the Pre-Bid Contact Information Form must be filled out completely. City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 620 Mulberry Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 291-4429 51 ITNEMS OF POTENTIAL MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 PARTICIPATION SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM PRIME BIDDER'S LETTERHEAD Contract No.: Letting Date: I, (subcontractor's name), hereby attest that I have been solicited for a bid on(project name) in the area of(description of work and bid item no.). (Prime contractor)has informed me that if I am interested in bidding, a subcontracting bid proposal must be submitted to the company office by (date) and (time). Subcontractor's Company Name Date Subcontractor's Signature Date Prime Bidder's Signature 52 SUBCONTRACTOR'S BID REQUEST FORM LETTER TO BE USED WHEN SOLICITING FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES Subcontractor Company Name Address RE: Contract No.: Dear • (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is presently soliciting for the following work in connection with the above referenced project. (Insert bid Item Nos. and Description of Work) (Prime Contractor's Company Name) is an Equal Opportunity Employer, and all qualified bidders will not be discriminated against due to race, religion, color, sex, or origin. If interested in bidding your proposal must be turned in to this office by and (Date) (Time) Sincerely, (Prime Contractor's Representative) Form CCO-3 (11/28/2001) 53 LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES LETTER OF INTENT TO BID (MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 LETTER) According to the Current MBE/WBE Contract Compliance Program - 2002, all MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 Contractors interested in submitting subcontractor quotes on construction projects with goals, MUST submit a LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to the City of Waterloo Contract Compliance Officer at least seven(7) days prior to bid opening. The LETTER OF INTENT TO BID must list the specific items which the MBE/WBE/SECTION 3 Contractor is interested in bidding. Letter should include the following: Name of Project: Your Company Name: Address: Phone: Date: List of Specific items to be bid: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: Item No. Description: (Subcontractor's Company Name and authorized signature) Return this LETTER OF INTENT TO BID to: Contract Compliance Officer Community Development Board 620 Mulberry St. Carnegie Annex, Suite 202 Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)291-4429 Form CCO-5(06-20-2002) 54 LETTER FORM FOR SUBCONTRACTOR QUOTES en ki Le) If) aai w y g 0 z 0 '"o ° O n 0 O s. 0 '' M v) 0 v' s. 0 ° U � O a w 0 C OV �oM o, O ° -d^Co w w• ^v cp O 0 c°) c r^) U O M Op • ° > .� W `.W o W Ce m ▪ O at o a�i (� a) Cl) ° 0G s F� L• 0 E" 0 s. 0 > V , V O y C» M •� � o � � O Z Q . Y aapbn� o 0 0 ; w p � ... or .0p3wq TS 1 ' Q F' � '3 a ti G.o -0 w 04' > � •p � �_ � - c ° U 04.Pw a , pF aw 0 az ^ O ' W 0 U 0 cVCpA�� U ate'+ �,N O = V Z M O • a) v, .fl M • a) rn Uw3 c.> - cA yz �.� y Ev en40 _ zU wCG � � p � A "' 3 ow ° 3 O0 0 w F � W � ci. O �� 3 A? zM ow O o 3Uk°•, .r •°'• w o �. U . 1-0 OZ r� pq " �' � �W W u' cam' z o a) C4 a'"> > � a 0 "cr U o c) o `�' � s � � o U � � w > to zQ W O : oW .-. boo W WE" 3W .° � w CA FG ,y c�c H o CO y COD v� W cc Pal W c� a�.... .... vi W Z .� 4.�> QE b bq� cH alb [� 0 ¢ i ... ,,,, �°a, Il O y Or t -�s fl ^o W 3 c 0 ai C. 't ;� F �' ECO let = � " o 00s... o z � W43 � 'v�, � '= Quo M a0i at E� -C a) a'") RI O • $_ O •••• O 0 .5 ti g 0 O O 3 ' U v, ti 0 " W R: 4C) - > y cct ... C +- ti 0 ocl i—i ca w Z ° OCI) 4., 0 V > o' ° '-' '•., ° V ; `� ``j A U � .� W E� 'a>�i 0 0 � 3 o ate) Q I > ) o. 12...0 . zs P� ° o a0i .� U o ° F is ° ° O . •° °� , s. W d' .tea• •° O �, vv >,o rwi� '" o o ate) a � �az -o f� F L. ° o'n •� 0 6 o a >, a) w w = 4 � 0 ;,� a)) :� Z 3 acct }) P. aaoi . . 00 „ w � .� � � o b coo � Q c) «3 W .-: > �'• c� w v v, 4 -o O -fl O 0 2 0 C a) Q a) v1 N -O c� O �' by k y O a) O 3 E bo a) a) ..= W V ° _ uo .� - 0 ,��, ,z w 0 0 ° .o .0 • sr U a, .o c 0 3 •0 A cUtai W `No000a0006A g 40 w° EUbo3 � c o30 .cv v) rs p4 w $ M z c°i °' p >, �' z c v, .- g 0 8 0 ° w a 3y, w •_ va co = z0 � y o-0.-, � .,-,cn ° .' > —E. W °• c0) 00 a' WZOUv `3O W o > � •- -flea'' ° '3 . v) = y w • bo U PG 5 .. w •OO ,o v ,-, B, . ZO ai 0 co y cOi `+ z O _ 0- Z_ v' -. f� 0 0 5^ v� -,: W r .u' U c1 - - Cs O s.. 0 0 O a) ..0 o N 0 OD c K; M 4°., > ^ N N a) o )0 , 3 E1 w 0 w o" 9, o p •= '—' V •" o " m v �: Z O -O `M,.- i W O M a) ,,, y U va U o al cam) 0 c f l .6 0 ; O 0 U a) G�u. ct = p�, ;v W 't P. = o U . o el s„ en a, fl � -as � U a) � . v' o � o o � ° o ¢mCti' �q a_• 0 ,,,, —i � � 4, .- O s. �, a ,s w moo ., to � � of >,� a�, FgW 33 0 � w 0 > +O-, 0 0 c ca •m '0 o •$ue o v, bA U ¢' �3 E"' W ° o a U U -O 4 U CV/ U Y 0 0 W 'O E w �' °' U . W w z p aG p U En I — a) L w . a c0 ° O0U W � c+-, a) . o c• • a.) a `ci o O c c o �i fl ci -o a; CObo PG 0 c CO U U p •0 c) W a o .• 0 cA Y 0 .� w >,w 0 a U bA = a) a) •� t- ci s., E 0 .. 0 0 "0 a) c U p 3 y� V .b ."' vVi W h Qy P-, a. O 69 .--, o .2,N az y M S V vi E-+ O, v? ,_ O 0 2 a) ° Lc) � oA-0 � 0 • u) c ^0 Ln 03 o C. •4 .• � VI y Z O 0 is r.+ : o o = U U OO�rr ., ,_ c Q Cr) Ti. - �i 'c = w E O v o 0 4 3 o U .� s.. w U 0 A w � > o y d A � " " 0 g •Co • 3, M N = MI U O QuIDA ct cct ° ,5 z 9 = —'' on W W C o C.) O zZ Mw � ° w Po c0o WOZw � 0a" O ° O ct cl) 4-iU = °' o W W 3 ¢W d — °� � 0 o A ..r ^C CA C4 C w . s c co 0Aai CO01 o CO cu cu. ct - O w MZ 3ct > o c Z . . Z � � � -. 0 � 0 W o CJ ▪ U w0 .. o � � y, O bA 0 pr y CI) 0.oho�WZ � - a Z C a � o 0 O[� 1-1 := 0 ._ p v,W C..) ›, o. c a. w � r4 c paA 030„ o .° v3 dM lom ZZ „ mo• w .E = z o w • O = cu 0 M ~ a >'Y dU Q a.)f zV 6> C � � o � WW� �3 � w HY Ua 4) N a oM U 2 p W O Ov F, = ° i � -oc» z p� 0. w � � 8 � � ip e w V: o c . 0 U CO °' PO W Fc U M "0 CiDw ° F- y , .) N -° w = c F z U c M w ,'O 0 O M W c oa 1 d z w0 .0 °, Z � z 3 - o 0 0 Oco p � w ct Z aw 'o � .-= E� Z O Q `c' a , •`f 4 W Gs co w E - - , c 9 � �o r: o4- V2 cAoO G y ) m O m } C ° � `'E OW 3 c N $2 Wo z E g F" W0:1 u4 . ^ N '�. PO v C O w 3 _ c z ¢ _0 U ci < -0 ›., w � 2 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CARTER ELECTRIC 725 Adams Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319) 23,2-9808 Pager: (319) 235-4021 Contact: Derrick Carter Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR CULPEPPER ELECTRIC 1731 Cottage Grove Avenue Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319) 235-0885 Fax: (319) 236-8177 Contact: Martin Culpepper Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Licensed Electrician Specializing in: ELECTRICAL CONTRACTOR DANIELS HOME IMPROVEMENT 339 Albany Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-1659 Contact: Sammy Daniels Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK, POURED WALLS—ALL TYPES, FOOTINGS, LIGHT DEMOLITION D.C. CORPORATION 426 Beech Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319)493-2542 FAX: (319) 236-0515 Contact: Terry Phillips Certified: City of Waterloo Certified MBE, Iowa DOT, TSB Certified Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND RESIDENTIAL DEMOLITION, CONCRETE PAVING, DRIVEWAYS, TRUCKING (ALL TYPES), GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 57 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS GREER'S WORKS 2003 Plainview Street Waterloo,IA 50703 Phone: (319) 233-4701 Contact: Willie Greer Specializing in: DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CARPENTRY, ROOFING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION OLD GREER'S WORKS 2309 Springview Street Waterloo, IA 50707 Phone: (319)233-2150 Contact: David L. Greer, Sr. Specializing in: ROOFING& GENERAL CONSTRUCTION QUICK CONSTRUCTION 217 Bates Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 215-4166 Contact: Leroy Harrington Specializing in: ALL TYPES OF CONCRETE FLATWORK AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION D & D CONSTRUCTION 1124 West Donald Street Waterloo, IA 50703 Phone: (319) 961-4208 Contact: Darrell E. Caldwell, Sr. Specializing in: ROOFING AND GENERAL CONSTRUCTION E. CASTRO ROOFING 702 Riehl Street Waterloo,IA 50701 Phone: (319) 215-5683 Contact: Emillio Castro Specializing in: ROOFING, SIDING, GENERAL CONSTRUCTION 58 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS CERTIFIED WBE CONTRACTORS ATLAS PAINTING, INC.* 911 Sycamore Street P.O. BOX 65 Waterloo, IA 50704 Phone: (319)232-9164 Specializing in: COMMERCIAL AND INDUSTRIAL PAINTING WATCO CONSTRUCTION, INC.* 2920 Texas Street Waterloo,IA 50702 Phone: (319) 233-7481 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Contact: Patricia J. Kimball Specializing in: STORM SEWER, INLETS, DRAIN TILE, WATER MAIN, SANITARY SEWER, INTAKE STRUCTURES PETERMAN & HAES CARPET ONE* 4003 University Waterloo, IA 50701 Phone: (319)233-6131 Fax: (319) 233-6133 Certified: City of Waterloo WBE Email: JR11486@cfu.net Contact: Carol Reese Specializing in: FLOOR COVERING *DENOTES WOMEN BUSINESS ENTERPRISE 59 CERTIFIED MBE CONTRACTORS STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS (To be submitted by the Bidder only upon the specific request of the City of Waterloo, Iowa.) All questions must be answered and the date given must be clear and comprehensive. This statement must be notarized. If necessary, questions may be answered on separate attached sheets. The Bidder may submit any additional information he desires. 1. Name of bidder. 2. Permanent main office address. 3. When organized. 4. If a corporation, when incorporated. 5. How many years have you been engaged in the contracting business under your present firm or trade name? 6. Contracts on hand: (Schedule these, showing amount of each contract and the appropriate anticipated dates of completion.) 7. Genera'.[ character of work performed by your company. 8. Have you ever failed to complete any work awarded to you? If so, where and why? 9. Have you ever defaulted on a contract? If so, where and why? 10. List the more important projects recently completed by your company, stating the approximate cost for each, and the month and year completed. 11. List your major equipment available for this contract. 12. Experience in construction work similar in importance to this project. 13. Background and experience of the principal members of your organization, including the officers. 14. Credit available: $ 15. Give bank reference: 16. Will you, upon request, fill out a detailed financial statement and furnish any other information that may be required by the City of Waterloo, Iowa? 61 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS 17. The undersigned hereby authorizes and requests any person, firm, or corporation to furnish any information requested by the City of Waterloo, Iowa, in verification of the recitals comprising this Statement of Bidder's Qualifications. Dated at , this day of , 201 . (Name of Bidder) By: Title: State of ) ) ss: County of ) , being duly sworn deposes and says that he is of (Name of Organization) and that the answers to the foregoing questions and all statements therein contained are true and correct. Subscribed and sworn to before me this day of , 201 Notary Public My commission expires , 62 STATEMENT OF BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 1. SCOPE OF WORK The work covered by this contract consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all operations, in connection with the F.Y. 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY, Contract No. 905, in accordance with these specifications. The specifications are dated January 9, 2017. They have the general title of F.Y. 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY, Contract No. 905. The standard specifications of the City of Waterloo are to be used along with the special provisions described herein and shall be considered as part of the contract documents. 2. CONFLICTING SPECIFICATIONS All requirements of other specifications contained in the contract documents which conflict with the provisions of the special provisions will be considered void. 3. DUMPING AREAS Excess material resulting from construction operations shall be hauled to the County Landfill or other area secured by the contractor and approved by the City Engineer. Rubble., rubbish, trees, brush, and other unsuitable backfill material, as designated by the City Engineer, shall be hauled to the County Landfill. All Landfill charges are to be considered incidental to the contract and are the responsibility of the contractor. 4. CONSTRUCTION DAMAGE The Contractor shall exercise care during construction operations to ensure the safety and protection to existing features located near or within the limits of construction. Damage caused by negligence or poor workmanship, as determined by the Engineer, shall be considered the Contractor's responsibility. 5. REMOVED MATERIALS All materials removed as part of this Contract shall remain the property of the City unless the City determines that the materials are not salvageable and the City does not want to retain ownership of the materials. Materials designated in the field by the Engineer as nonsalvageable shall be hauled and disposed of by the Contractor at no cost to the City. All other materials shall be transported to locations as directed by the Engineer. No separate measurement or payment will be made for hauling or disposing of removed materials and it shall be considered incidental to applicable items. 63 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 6. OVERHAUL Overhaul will not be paid for "surplus material" obtained from any of the items of construction under this contract. The cost of overhaul will be considered as incidental to the items to which it applies. 7. MAILBOXES The Contractor shall notify the United States Postal Department of mailboxes, which interfere with any part of the work before removing them, and the Contractor will relocate them as required by the Postmaster. The removal and replacement of mailboxes will not be considered for direct payment but will be considered incidental to the item to which it applies. 8. PAY ITEMS All pay items are listed in the proposal and shall include the purchase of all materials, delivery of these materials, and furnishing all labor, plant, and miscellaneous work needed to make the item complete. All such cost shall be incidental to the proposed item to which it applies and shall not be considered for separate payment. 9. BREAKDOWN OF LUMP SUM CONTRACT PRICE ITEMS The Contractor shall, immediately upon execution and delivery of the contract, before the first estimate for payment is made, deliver to the City Engineer a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the lump sum contract prices. The submitted breakdown shall be approved by the City Engineer prior to any payment of any lump sum price item. 10. PERMISSION TO HAUL OVER STREETS,RAILROADS, AND HIGHWAYS The Contractor will be required to secure, from the proper authorities, permission or permit which may be required to haul over streets, highways, railroads or private property, and any hauling operations of the Contractor shall be subject to the requirements of such permits, permission, and to all applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances governing hauling and movement of equipment over streets, railroads, highways, and private property. Any costs or inconvenience caused by obtaining any necessary permits or permission shall be considered completely covered by the price bid for the items in the proposal. 11. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING The City Engineer shall approve Contractor's work schedule prior to starting. All revisions shall also be approved. The City Engineer may change the schedule to accommodate changing construction conditions. 64 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS The Contractor shall coordinate the work under this contract with contractors performing work under other contracts, which may be performed concurrently. The Contractor shall be responsible to notify the Police, Fire, Street, and Engineering Departments of the closing and opening of streets. The Contractor shall commence work within ten (10) days after receipt of the "Notice to Proceed" and diligently execute the work of the contract to completion. 12. PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Before any work is started, the Contractor shall arrange with the City Engineer to hold a pre-construction conference for the purpose of discussing the contract. 13. UNDE:RGROUND UTILITIES It is the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain the location of gas lines, water lines, electric, telephone, and cable television cables or wires from the various utility companies and the City electrician before starting any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to any underground utilities. The Contractor shall expose those utilities indicated on the plans so that elevations may be determined before beginning construction. This work shall be considered incidental to other items of work. If the Contractor believes that additional costs have been incurred due to a utility being improperly located, the resolution of the additional costs incurred shall be made between the contractor and the respective utility company. 14. TRAFFIC SIGNS AND STREET SIGNS The Contractor shall contact the City of Waterloo Traffic Operations Department to have any street sign that will be affected by construction removed and replaced when the work has been completed. 15. TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION The Contractor shall provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required per the current Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD) or as may be ordered by the Engineer,to ensure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. 16. GRADES,LINES,LEVELS,AND SURVEYS The Contractor shall verify all grades, lines, levels, and dimensions as shown on the drawings, and he shall report any errors or inconsistencies in the same to the City Engineer before commencing work. 65 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS 17. SAFETY OF WORKERS AND PUBLIC The Contractor shall, at all times, take necessary precautions to protect the life and health of all persons employed on this project and the public. He shall provide necessary safety devices and safeguards in accordance with latest and best accident prevention practices. All such protection shall be furnished to employees without cost. No direct measurement of payment shall be made for this protection but shall be considered incidental to other items of work. The public shall be kept outside of any work area. 18. WORKING ON SATURDAYS, SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in writing forty-eight (48) hours in advance if work on Saturday is planned. By noon the Friday before the planned Saturday work, the Contractor shall confirm the Saturday work schedule with the project inspector. Work on Sunday requires prior approval of the Engineer in accordance with the Waterloo Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall not work the following days in 2017 due to City holidays: May 29, 2017 (Memorial Day) July 4, 2017 (Independence Day) 66 GENERAL SPECIAL PROVISIONS GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Department of Engineering SECTION A -Definitions of Terms SECTION B - Scope of work SECTION C - Control of Materials and Work SECTION D -Procedure and Progress SECTION E - Measurements and Payments SECTION F- Legal Relations and Responsibility SECTION A - DEFINITIONS OF TERMS 1. CITY. The City of Waterloo, Iowa, which is the Party of the First Part of the accompanying contract, acting through its authorized representative. 2. COUNCIL. The duly elected Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. 3. ENGINEER. The City Engineer of Waterloo, Iowa, or his authorized representative. 4. INSPECTOR. The authorized representative of the Engineer, assigned to the detailed inspection of the work or materials therefor and to such other duties as may be delegated to him in these specifications. 5. CONTRACTOR. The Party of the Second Part in the accompanying contract for the improvement covered by these specifications, or his authorized representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR. Any person, firm, or corporation who has, with the approval of the Council, contracted with the Contractor to execute and perform in his stead all or any part of the contract. 7. BIDDER. Any individual, firm, or corporation submitting a proposal for all or a part of the work provided for in these specifications. 8. PROPOSAL GUARANTEE. The security designed in the Notice of Bidders or Proposal to be furnished by the bidder as a guarantee of good faith to enter into a contract and furnish an acceptable bond for the work contemplated if it be awarded him. 9. SURETY. The corporate body bound with and for the Contractor for the acceptable performance of the contract. 10. PROPOSAL. The written Proposal, submitted by the bidder in the prescribed manner and on the standard form, for the improvements covered by these specifications. 67 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 11. SPECIFICATIONS. The documents that set forth the manner in which the proposed work is to be accomplished which have been prepared by the Engineer and approved by the City Council, official copies of which are now on file with the City Clerk. 12. SPECIAL PROVISIONS. Clauses or memoranda not contained herein, applying to the contract of which these specifications are a part, which change or supplement these specifications. 13. CONTRACT. The agreement entered into between the City and the Contractor, setting forth the terms under which the work covered by the plans and specifications is to be performed. The contract includes all conditions, definitions, and instructions set forth in the official publications relating to the work, the official contract and specifications, the Proposal, official plans, and all supplemental agreements entered into by the parties to the contract. 14. NOTICE TO BIDDERS. The notice called attention of bidders to the time and place for receiving bids, containing a brief description of the work, and briefly setting forth the requirements and conditions for submission of Proposals. 15. INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS. The clauses setting forth in detail the information relative to the proposed work and requirements for the submission of Proposals. 16. PLANS. The plans for the improvement covered by the specifications and approved by the Council, official copies of which are on file with the City Clerk. 17. CONTRACT BOND. The bond executed by the Contractor and his surety in favor of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, guaranteeing the complete execution of the contract in accordance with the plans and specifications, the payment of all debts pertaining to the work, and maintenance of the work as provided by law or by the specifications. 18. CONTRACT PERIOD. The period from the specified date for beginning the work to the specified date of completion, both dates inclusive. The contract period may be extended by the Council, as provided in these specifications, in which event the contract period includes the new date of completion. 19. OFFICIAL PUBLICATIONS. The official publications are the formal resolutions and notices relative to the proposed improvement that are required by law to be published in a prescribed manner and that have actually been published in accordance with the statutes relating thereto. Attention is directed to the fact that these official publications are by statute vested with all of the force and effect of contract obligations. 20. A.S.T.M. Abbreviation for American Society for Testing Materials. 21. WORK. The term "Work" of the Contractor and Subcontractor includes labor or materials or both, equipment, transportation, or other facilities necessary to complete the contract. 68 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 22. TIME. All time limits stated in the contract documents are of the essence in the contract. SECTION B - SCOPE OF WORK 1. CORRELATION AND INTENT OF DOCUMENTS. The Contract documents are complementary, and what is called for by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all. The intention of the documents is to include all labor, materials, equipment, and transportation necessary for the proper execution of the work. Materials or work described in words which, so applied, have a well-known technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standard. 2. DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS. Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents, the engineer shall furnish to the Contractor, free of charge, all copies of drawings and specifications reasonably necessary for the execution of the work. The Contractor shall keep one (1) copy of all drawings and specifications on the work available to the, Engineer and to his representatives. 3. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING. It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has,, by careful examination, satisfied himself as to the nature, character and location of the work, the conformance to the ground, the character, quality, and quantity of the materials to be encountered, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, the general and local conditions, and all other matters which can, in any way, affect the work under this contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of the Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. 4. REPORTING ERRORS AND DISCREPANCIES. If the Contractor, in the course of the work, finds any discrepancies between the plans and the physical conditions of the locality, or any errors of omission in plans or in the layout as given by said stakes and instructions, it shall be his duty to inform the Engineer immediately, in writing, and the Engineer shall promptly correct the same. 5. ALTERATION OR CORRECTION OF PLANS. The plans are made up from surveys that are presumably correct and represent the foreseen construction requirements. Any modification of the plans which may be required by the exigencies of the construction or any corrections made necessary because of errors in the original surveys, will be made by the Engineer. Should corrections or modifications of the plans or specifications require a different quality or class of work than that upon which the unit prices in the Proposal are based, or if the modifications or corrections are required in parts of the work partially completed and such modifications result in an increased cost to the Contractor, the amount to be paid for work resulting from such changes shall be agreed upon in writing at the time the changes are ordered 69 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION and before the work is begun by the Contractor. No allowance will be made for anticipated profits on work not performed. 6. CHANGES IN THE WORK. The City, without invalidating the contract, may order extra work or make changes by altering, adding to, or deducting from the work, the contract sum being adjusted by agreement or arbitration before such changed work is undertaken. All such work shall be executed under the conditions of the original contract, except that any claim for extension of time caused thereby shall be adjusted at the time of ordering such change. 7. INCREASED OR DECREASED QUANTITIES. The right is reserved without impairing the contract, to order the performance of such work of a class not contemplated in the Proposal or to increase or decrease the quantities as may be considered necessary to complete fully and satisfactorily the work included in the contract. However, when the work is completed without change in the plans, and the measured quantity of any item of work varies by more than twenty percent (20%) from the estimated quantity specified in the contract, an adjustment in price may be made for such item of work by agreement between the Engineer and the Contractor, subject to the approval of the City Council. Either party to the contract may request such an adjustment. 8. LANDS AND RIGHT OF WAY. The City shall provide the lands upon which the work under this contract is to be done, except that the Contractor shall provide land required for the erection of temporary construction facilities and storage of his material, together with the right of access to same. 9. CITY WATER. The Contractor shall be allowed to use City Water but before any water is used, he shall make application to the Waterloo Water Works for a temporary water connection from a fire hydrant or by some other connection method. Water usage will be charged at the rate for temporary water service. The rules, regulations, and water rates are available at the Waterloo Water Works offices at 325 Sycamore Street or their telephone number is 319-232-6280. 10. RIGHTS OF VARIOUS INTERESTS. Whenever work being done by the City's forces or by other Contractors is contiguous to work covered by this contract, the respective rights of the various interests involved shall be established by the Engineer to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. 11. CLOSING STREETS TO TRAFFIC. The Engineer shall be the judge of how many streets or parts of streets it is necessary for the Contractor to close at any time and may refuse to permit the closing of additional streets until such of the work is finished and opened to traffic as he may direct. 12. OBSTRUCTION OF STREETS. The work is to be carried on in such manner as to obstruct the streets, highways, and alleys as little as possible. The Contractor shall carry on the different parts of the work so as to complete the whole, as nearly as practicable, at the same time. In doing the work, the Contractor shall follow the directions of the Engineer as to the place or places where work shall be started or be carried on and the direction in which it shall be done. 70 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 13. SHANTIES AND BUILDINGS. Shanties or other buildings shall not be erected in or upon any street, highway, or alley without permission of the Engineer. If such permission be granted, it may be upon any reasonable terms prescribed by the person or body granting such permission. 14. SANITARY CONVENIENCES. The Contractor shall furnish the necessary sanitary conveniences, properly secluded, for the laborers on the work, and these shall be maintained in a manner that will be inoffensive to the public. 15. CLEANING UP. The Contractor shall, as directed by the Engineer, remove from the City°'s property and from all public and private property, at his own expense, all temporary structures, rubbish, and waste materials resulting from his operations before work can be considered completed. The Contractor shall also renew or replace any and all fences, sidewalks, or other property damaged or disturbed by his work. 16. OMISSION OF PARTS OF GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS. Parts of the General Specifications deemed not to apply to some particular work may be omitted by special reference in other parts of the contract documents. SECTION C - CONTROL OF MATERIALS AND WORK 1. SUPERVISION AND INSPECTION. The Engineer shall have supervision of the construction provided for in this Contract and shall decide any and all questions which may arise as to the quality and acceptability of materials furnished, work performed, manner of performance, rate of progress on the work, and all questions regarding the acceptable fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. Materials and construction work shall, at all times, be subject to the inspection of the Engineer or his representatives. The Contractor shall be held strictly to the true intent of these specifications as regards the quality of materials, workmanship, and the diligent prosecution of the work. The Engineer and his representatives shall, at all times, have access to the work wherever it is in preparation of progress, and the Contractor shall provide proper facilities for such access and for inspection. If the specifications, the Engineer's instructions, law ordinances, or any public authority require any work and/or materials to be especially tested or approved, the Contractor shall give the Engineer timely notice of readiness for inspection. If the inspection is to be made by authority other than the Engineer, the Contractor shall notify the engineer of the date fixed for inspection. Inspections by the Engineer will be promptly made and, where practicable, at the source of supply. If any work should be covered up without the approval or consent of the Engineer, it must, if required by the Engineer, be uncovered for examination at the Contractor's expense. Re-examination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer, and, if so ordered, the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be found in accordance with the 71 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Contract, the City shall pay the cost of re-examination and replacement. If such work be found not in accordance with the Contract, the Contractor shall pay such cost unless he shall show that the defect in the work was caused by another Contractor, and, in that event, the City shall pay the cost. 2. AUTHORITIES AND DUTIES OF INSPECTORS. Inspectors may be stationed on the work to report to the Engineer as to the progress of the work and the manner in which it is being performed; also, to report whenever it appears that materials furnished and work performed by the Contractor fail to fulfill the requirements of the specifications and Contract, and to direct the attention of the Contractor to such failure or infringement; but such inspection shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligations to furnish acceptable materials or to provide completed construction that is satisfactory in every particular. In case of any dispute arising between the Inspector and the Contractor as to materials furnished or the manner of performing the work, the Inspector shall have the authority to reject materials or suspend the work until the question at issue can be referred to and decided by the Engineer. Inspectors are not authorized to revoke, alter, enlarge, relax, or release any requirements of these specifications. The Inspector shall, in no case, act as foreman or perform other duties for the Contractor, or interfere with the management of the work by the latter. 3. STATUS OF THE ENGINEER. The Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the work. He has authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the Contract. He shall also have authority to reject any work and/or materials which do not conform to the specifications, to direct the application of forces to any portion of the work as, in his judgment, is required, and to order the force increased or diminished, and to decide questions which arise in the execution of the work. 4. ENGINEER'S DECISIONS. The Engineer shall, within a reasonable time, make decisions on all claims of the Contractor and on all other matters relating to the execution and progress of the work or the interpretation of the contract documents. All such decisions of the Engineer shall be final except as to the element of time and financial consideration involved, which, if no agreement in regard thereto is reached, shall be subject to arbitration. 5. STAKES AND INSTRUCTIONS. The Contractor shall provide reasonable and necessary opportunities and facilities for setting stakes and making measurements. The Contractor shall not furnish stakes or men to set them. He shall not proceed until he has received from the Engineer such stakes and instructions as may be necessary to the progress of the work. The Contractor shall carefully preserve bench marks, reference points, and stakes, and in case of willful or careless destruction, he shall be charged with the resulting extra expense and shall be responsible for any mistakes that may be caused, by their loss or disturbance. 6. SUPERINTENDENCE. The Contractor shall keep on his work during its progress a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to the 72 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Engineer. The Superintendent shall not be changed except with the consent of the Engineer, unless the Superintendent proves to be unsatisfactory to the Contractor and ceases to be in his employ. The Superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence, and all directions given to him shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. Important decisions shall be confirmed in writing to the Contractor. Other directions shall be so confirmed on written request in each case. The Contractor shall give efficient supervision to the work using his best skill and attention. He shall carefully study and compare all drawings, specifications, and other instructions, and shall report at once to the Engineer any error, inconsistency, or omission which he may discover. 7. REMOVAL OF UNAUTHORIZED WORK. Work done without lines and grade being give, work done beyond lines shown on the plans or as given, except as herein provided, or any extra or additional work done without authority, will be considered as unauthorized and at the expense of the Contractor and will not be paid for under the provisions of the Contract. Work so done may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 8. REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE MATERIALS OR WORK. The Contractor shall promptly remove from the premises all materials condemned by the engineer as failing to conform to the Contract; whether incorporated in the work or not, and the Contractor shall promptly replace and re-execute his own work in accordance with the contract and without expense to the City, and shall bear the expense of making good all work of other Contractors destroyed or damaged by such removal or replacement. If the Contractor does not remove such condemned work and materials within a reasonable time, fixed by written notice, the City may remove them and may store the material at the expense of the Contractor. If the Contractor does not pay the expense of such removal within a reasonable time thereafter, the City may, upon ten (10) days' written notice, sell such materials at auction or at:private sale and shall account for the net proceeds thereof, after deducting all the costs and expense that should have been borne by the Contractor; or, if the net proceeds of such sale are insufficient to pay the expenses of removal, the City may deduct the balance from any amounts due the Contractor. 9. MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, APPLIANCES, AND FACILITIES. Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, labor, water, tools, equipment, light, power, transportation, and other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work. Materials shall be of the quality specified for each particular part of the work. Whenever, in construction of the work or in the manufacture of any article of appliance necessary for the construction or operation of the work, it is necessary to use any material that is not fully specified in these specifications, it shall be of good quality and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 73 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION Any appliance that is necessary for the construction or operation of the work and is commonly recognized as a part of the work, shall be furnished by the Contractor as part of the work, whether or not it is specifically called for in the plans and specifications, and such appliance shall be of good quality and standard make and shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 10. MATERIAL SAMPLES. Before the contract is awarded, the bidder may be required to furnish a statement of the origin, composition, and manufacture of any and all materials proposed for use in the performance of the Contract, together with samples of the material. These samples will be considered as representative and typical of the material to be obtained from any particular source. 11. CHARACTER OF WORKMEN AND EQUIPMENT. The Contractor shall employ competent and efficient workmen for every kind of work. Any person employed on the work who shall refuse or neglect to obey the directions of the engineer or Inspector, or who shall be deemed incompetent or disorderly, or who shall commit trespass upon public or private property in the vicinity of the work, shall be dismissed when the Engineer so orders, and shall not be re-employed unless express permission be given by the Engineer. The Contractor shall, at all times, enforce discipline and good order among his employees. The methods, equipment, and appliances used on the work, and the labor employed, shall be such as will produce a satisfactory quality of work and shall be adequate to complete the contract within the specified time limit. 12. HIRING CITY EMPLOYEES. The Contractor shall not employ and hire any of the City's employees without the permission of the Engineer. 13. LABOR. Local labor shall be given preferences so far as practicable. 14. THE CITY'S RIGHT TO DO WORK. If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this Contract, the City of Waterloo, after three (3) days' written notice to the Contractor may, without prejudice to any other remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor, provided, however, that the Engineer shall approve both such action and the amount charged to the Contractor. SECTION D - PROCEDURE AND PROGRESS 1. ORDER OF COMPLETION - USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS. The Contractor shall complete any portion or portions of the work in such order or time as the Engineer may require. The City shall have the right to take possession of an use completed or partially completed portion of the work at any time, but such taking possession and use shall not be deemed an acceptance of work so taken or used, or any part thereof. If such prior use 74 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION increases the cost of or delays the work, the Contractor shall be entitled to such extra compensation or extension of time, or both, as the Engineer may determine. 2. WEATHER. During stormy or inclement weather, all work shall be suspended, except such as can be done in an acceptable manner. Permission to work during freezing, stormy, or inclement weather shall in no way be construed as a release of the Contractor's responsibility regarding the quality of the finished work at such time. 3. SUNDAYS AND LEGAL HOLIDAYS. Except for such work as may be required to properly maintain or protect completed or partially completed construction or to maintain lights and barricades, no work will be permitted on Sundays or legal holidays without specific permission of the Engineer. 4. DELAYS AND EXTENSION OF TIME. If the Contractor be delayed in the completion of the work by an act of neglect of the City, or its employees; or by any other Contractor employed by the City; or by changes ordered in the work; or by strikes, lockouts, fire, unusual delays in transportation, unavoidable casualties, or any cause beyond the Contractor's control; or by delay authorized by the Engineer pending arbitration; or by any cause which the Engineer shall decide justifies the delay, then the time of completion shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Engineer may decide will compensate for such delay. No such extension shall be made for delay occurring more than thirty (30) days before claim therefor is made in writing to the Engineer. In the case of a continuing cause of delay, only one claim is necessary. This article does not exclude the recovery of damages for delay by either party under provisions in the contract documents. 5. TEMPORARY SUSPENSION OF WORK. The Engineer shall have authority to suspend the work, wholly or in part, for such period or periods of time as he may deem necessary, due to unsuitable weather or such other conditions as are considered unfavorable for the suitable prosecution of the work, or for such time as is necessary due to the failure to the Contractor to carry out orders given or to perform any or all provisions of the Contract. 6. NOTICES - HOW SERVED. Any notice to be given by the City to the Contractor under this contract shall be deemed to be served if the same be delivered to the man in charge of any office used by the Contractor or his foreman or agent at or near the work, or deposited in the post office, postpaid, addressed to the Contractor at his last known place of business. 7. PROGRESS OF WORK. The progress of the work shall be such that, at the expiration of one-fourth (1/4) of the contract period, one-eighth (1/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of one-half (1/2) of the contract period, three-eighths (3/8) of the work shall be completed; at the expiration of three-fourths (3/4) of the contract period, the work shall be three-fourths (3/4) completed, and the whole work shall be completed at the expiration of the contract period. 75 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION If, at any time the above schedule is not being maintained, the Council may give written notice to the Contractor and his sureties that the specifications are not being complied with. Such notice shall state what action on the part of the Contractor is required to bring the work within the requirements of the specifications. If the Contractor fails, within ten (10) days, to proceed as directed in the said notice, then the Council shall have authority to annul this contract without process or action at law and take over the prosecution and completion of the work, as provided under the article covering City's right to terminate contract. 8. CITY'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT. If the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt; or if he should make a general assignment for the benefit of this creditor; or if a Receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency; or if he should persistently or repeatedly refuse or should fail, except in cases for which extension of time is provided, to supply enough skilled workmen or proper materials; or if he should fail to make prompt payment to Subcontractors or for materials or labor; or if he should persistently disregard laws, ordinances, or the instructions of the Engineer; or if he should otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the contract, then the City, upon the certificate of the Engineer that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedy, and after giving the Contractor seven (7) days' written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials, tools and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. In such cases, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expenses of finishing the work, including compensation for additional managerial and administration services, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the City. The expense incurred by the City as herein provided and the damage incurred through the Contractor's default shall be certified by the Engineer. 9. REMOVAL OF EQUIPMENT. In the case of annulment of this contract before completion, from any cause whatsoever, the Contractor, if notified to do so by the City; shall promptly remove any part or all of his equipment and supplies from the property of the City, failing which, the City shall have the right to remove such equipment and supplies at the expense of the Contractor. SECTION E -MEASUREMENTS AND PAYMENT 1. STANDARD OF MEASUREMENT. All work completed under the contract shall be measured by the Engineer according to the United States standard measures. 2. SCOPE OF PAYMENTS. The Engineer's measurements of quantities shall be the basis for final payment for the work performed under this Contract. After the work is 76 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION completed, the Engineer will make measurements and computations of the number of units of each of the various items of work completed, and the Contractor will be paid for the actual amount of work performed at the rates specified in his Proposal. Before final settlement is made, the Council may require the Contractor to submit a list of all persons furnishing labor or materials, with evidence that such persons have been paid in full. Payment shall be made in the manner set forth in official publications and Council Proceedings relative thereto. 3. PAYMENT FOR EXTRA WORK. Such extra work as may have been ordered by the Engineer and performed by the Contractor shall be compensated for as provided herein. If work is to be done or materials are to be furnished by the Contractor which cannot properly be classified under unit prices included in the Proposal, the Contractor shall be paid therefor the actual reasonable cost of the labor and materials entering permanently in such work, plus fifteen percent (15%) of the cost thereof. In computing the labor cost on such extra work, the following items shall be included: (a) Actual payroll expenditures for labor at the current rate therefor, and cost of materials. (b) Pay of foreman and timekeepers for actual time required on the extra work. (c) Liability insurance, prorated, for the extra work. Labor cost items on extra work shall be furnished in duplicate by the Contractor to the Inspector daily. The Inspector shall check the items, and if he finds them to be correct, he shall so certify on the statement of cost, returning one copy to the Contractor and filing one copy with the Engineer. The Engineer shall determine the cost of materials entering into extra work from the materials and receipted freight bills for the same. For any special machine, power tools, or equipment, including fuel and lubricants, but not including small hand tools, which may be deemed necessary or desirable to use, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable rental thereon, to be agreed upon in writing by the Engineer before such work is begun, and to which sum no percentage is to be added. The item of cost shall not include repairs or replacement of equipment or overhead expenses of any character. The fifteen percent (15%) allowed is considered to cover the use of hand tools and all overhead expenses except liability insurance. In no case will a claim for extra compensation be allowed unless the work upon which the claim is based has been ordered in writing, except as provided hereinafter. 4. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COST. If the Contractor claims that any instructions, by drawings or otherwise, involved extra cost under this contract, he shall give the Engineer written notice thereof within ten(10) days after completion of the work. 77 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION No such claim shall be valid unless so made. 5. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COMPENSATION. If the Contractor deems that extra compensation is due him for work and/or materials that he considered is not clearly covered in the items for which he submitted unit prices in his bid and that were not ordered in writing by the Engineer as an extra s heretofore provided, the Contractor shall notify the Engineer, in writing, of his intention to make claim for extra compensation for work and/or material before starting construction. If such written notification is not given or the Engineer is not afforded proper facilities by the Contractor for keeping strict account of actual cost as defined herein, then the Contractor hereby agrees to waive the claim for extra compensation. Such notice to the engineer and the fact that the Engineer has kept account of cost as aforesaid, shall not in any way be construed as proving the validity of the claim, which must be passed upon by the Council. In the event that the Council finds the claim to be just, it shall be allowed and paid for as extra work as provided herein. 6. COMPLETION REPORT AND OBJECTIONS THERETO. Within ten (10) days after the full completion of the work to be done under this contract, the Engineer shall make a written statement of all the work done by the Contractor hereunder, stating the quantity of each item as found by him and including a statement of all credits for extra work and all credits or debits for changes, alterations, omissions, and defects, and shall forthwith deliver a copy of such statement to the Contractor. The Contractor shall compare such statement with his own records and shall then, in writing, either approve such statement or point out any claimed errors or omissions. If any of such claims are found correct, the Engineer shall, within ten (10) days, prepare a new statement, a copy of which shall in like manner be delivered unto the Contractor. The Engineer will not file a formal completion report with the City until the Contractor has approved the same. If the figures of the Engineer and the Contractor cannot be reconciled, or there is a difference of opinion regarding some item or items, then such difference of opinion shall be submitted to arbitration as hereinafter provided, and the decision of the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and the Engineer shall, within a period of five (5) days, file his completion report. Before action by the City Council upon such completion report, the Contractor shall also file a written statement of any claims he may have against the City, other than those shown by such completion report, growing out of this contract or the work done hereunder. The City shall retain ten percent (10%) of the amount due the Contractor on the completion report for a period of thirty (30) days. If no claims are filed against the Contractor within thirty (30) days, the final ten percent(10%) shall then be paid to the Contractor. 7. WAIVER. By the execution of this contract ,the Contractor agrees that any objections he may have to the statement of the amount of work done hereunder included by the Engineer in this completion report, and any claims of the Contractor against the City growing out of this contract and the work done hereunder which are not stated in writing in the manner and within the time provided in Article 6, Section E hereof, shall be waived, and no such claim shall thereafter be asserted against the City. 78 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION SECTION F -LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES 1. LAWS RELATING TO WORK. The Contractor is presumed to be familiar with all laws, ordinances, and regulations which may, in any manner, affect those engaged or employed upon the work or the materials or equipment used in or upon the work, and shall conduct the work so as not to conflict with such laws, ordinances, and regulations. 2. PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY. The Contractor for any part of the improvement shall be held responsible for the care of materials and of partially completed and completed work until final acceptance of the same by the Council. He will be required to make good at his own expense any damage which the work may sustain from any cause prior to the filing of the engineer's certificate of completion. He shall take all risk from floods and casualties of every description and make no charge for delay due to such cause. He may, however, be allowed a reasonable extension of time on account of such delays. He shall correct or make good at his own expense all damages to adjacent property due to the acts or negligence of his employees of the prosecution of his work, and save the City harmless therefor. The Contractor shall be held liable and responsible for all damages done to water, sewer, drain, or other underground pipes and structures, and to sidewalks and private property. 3. RESPONSIBILITY FOR ACCIDENTS. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damages sustained by persons or property due to the carrying on of his work until final acceptance thereof, or until released by the Engineer in writing. 4. LIABILITY INSURANCE. The Contractor shall carry liability insurance which shall save the City harmless and protect the public and any person from injury sustained by the reason of the prosecution of the work or the handling or storing of materials therefor, and said Contractor shall also carry liability insurance which shall meet the requirements of the Iowa Worker's Compensation Law. Before work shall be started on this contract, the Contractor shall furnish the City Clerk with proper affidavit or Affidavits executed by representatives of duly qualified insurance companies, evidencing that said insurance company or companies have issued liability insurance policies, effective during the life of the contract, or for a period of a least ten (10) days following the filing of written notice of cancellation, protecting the public and any person from injuries or damages sustained by reason of carrying on the work involved in the Contract. The affidavit shall specifically evidence the following forms of insurance protection: (a) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by persons directly employed by the Contractor. (b) Public liability insurance covering all operations performed by any Subcontractor to whom a portion of the work may have been assigned. 79 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION (c) Public liability insurance covering all work upon the project performed by any independent Contractor working under the direction of either the principal Contractor or a Subcontractor. (d) Motor vehicle bodily injury liability insurance and property damage liability insurance on all motor vehicles employed on the work, whether owned by the Contractor or by other persons, firms, or corporations. (e) The minimum protection shall be as follows: Comprehensive General Liability Insurance General Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Products—Completed Operations Aggregate Limit $ 5,000,000.00 Each Occurrence Limit $ 5 ,000,000.00 Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance $ 1,000,000.00 The Contractor shall have the City of Waterloo, Iowa, named as an "Additional Named Insured". A certificate, or a policy if requested, shall be filed with the Owner. All certificates and/or policies of insurance furnished by the Contractor to be filed with the City Clerk shall include the name and address of the agency issuing the same. It shall also be required that the City Clerk be notified by registered mail of the cancellation or expiration of the above insurance. 5. BARRICADES AND SIGNS. The Contractor shall, at his own expense and without further or other order, provide, erect, and maintain, at all times during the progress and suspension of the work and until completion and final acceptance thereof, suitable and requisite barricades, signs, or other adequate protection, as required by the latest edition of the "Iowa Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices for Streets and Highways" and shall provide, keep, and maintain such barricades, signs, etc., as may be required or as may be ordered by the City Engineer,to insure the safety of the public as well as those engaged on the work. All barricading plans shall be approved by the City Engineer. 6. ROYALTIES AND PATENTS. The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent rights and shall save the City harmless from loss on account thereof, except that the City shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular process or the product of a particular manufacturer is specified. 7. PERMITS AND REGULATIONS. Permits and licenses of a temporary nature for the prosecution of the work shall be secured and paid for by the Contractor. Permits, license, and easements for permanent changes in existing facilities shall be secured and paid for by the City. 80 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 8. CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES. Any claim for damages arising under this Contract shall be made in writing to the party liable within a reasonable time of the first observance of such damage and no later than the time of final payment, except as expressly stipulated otherwise in the case of faulty work or materials, and shall be adjusted by agreement or arbitration. The Contractor shall be held for the payment of all just claims against him arising out of the prosecution of this contract, and his bond will not be released until such claims are paid for dismissed. 9. _ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT. The Contractor shall not sell or assign the contract or sublet any portion of the work provided for therein without the written consent of the City Council. 10. SUBCONTRACTORS. The Contractor shall, as soon as practicable after the signature of the contract, notify the Engineer in writing of the names of the Subcontractors proposed for the work and shall not employ any that the Engineer may, within a reasonable time, object to as incompetent or unfit. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omission of his Subcontractors and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them as he is for the acts and omissions of persons directly employed by him. Nothing contained in the contract documents shall create any contractual relation between any Subcontractor and the City. 11. ARBITRATION. All questions subject to arbitration under this Contract shall be submitted to arbitration at the choice of either party to the dispute. The Contractor shall not cause a delay of the work during any arbitration proceedings, except by agreement with the Engineer. The demand for arbitration shall be filed in writing with the Engineer, in the case of an appeal from his decision, within ten (10) days of its receipt, and in any other case, within a reasonable time after cause thereof, and in no case later than the time of final payment, except as otherwise expressly stipulated in the contract. If the Engineer fails to make a decision within a reasonable time, an appeal to arbitration may be taken as if his decision had been rendered against the part appealing. No one shall be nominated or act as an arbitrator who is in any way financially interested in the contract or in the business affairs of either the City or the Contractor. The general procedure shall conform to the laws of the State of Iowa. Unless otherwise provided by such laws, the parties may agree upon one arbitrator; otherwise, there shall be three- -one named in writing by each party to this contract to the other party, and the third chosen by these two arbitrators, or, if they fail to select a third within ten (10) days, then he shall be chosen 81 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION by the Comptroller of the State of Iowa. Should either party refuse or neglect to supply the arbitrators with any papers or information demanded in writing,the arbitrators are empowered by both parties to proceed ex parte. If there be one arbitrator, his decision shall be binding; if three, the decision of any two shall be binding. Such decision shall be a condition precedent to any right of legal action, and, wherever permitted by law, it may be filed in Court to carry it into effect. The arbitrators, if they deem that the case demands it, are authorized to award to the party whose contention is sustained such sums as they shall deem proper for the time, expense, and trouble incident to the appeal, and, if the appeal was taken without reasonable cause, damages for delay, the arbitrators shall fix their own compensation unless otherwise provided by agreement, and shall assess the costs and charges of the arbitration upon either or both parties. The award of the arbitrators must be in writing, and it shall not be open to objections on account of the form of proceeding or the award, unless otherwise provided by the laws of Iowa. In the event of such laws providing on any matter covered by this article otherwise than as hereinbefore specified, the method of procedure throughout and the legal effect of the award shall be wholly in accordance with the laws of the State of Iowa, it being intended hereby to lay down a principle of action to be followed, leaving its local application to be adopted to the legal requirements of the place in which the work is to be done. 12. PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BONDS. The Contractor shall, at the time of execution and delivery of this contract and before the taking effect of same, furnish and deliver to the City written bonds of indemnity to the amount required by law in form and substance, and with surety thereon satisfactory and acceptable to the City, to insure the faithful performance and payment by the Contractor of all the covenants and agreements on the part of the Contractor contained in this contract. These bonds shall remain in force and effect for the full amount of the Contract. 13. PERSONAL LIABILITY OF PUBLIC OFFICIALS. In carrying out any of the provisions of the Contract or in exercising any power or authority granted him thereby, there shall be no liability upon the Engineer or his authorized assistants, either personally or as an official of the City, it being understood that in such matters he acts as the agent and representative of the City. 14. JURISDICTION. Any action in Court against the Contractor or sureties on his bond because of damages to property or individuals by said Contractor or his workmen, or because of the violation of any provisions of the specifications, or on account of the failure of said Contractor to comply fully with these provisions, shall be brought in the District Court of the State of Iowa in and for Black Hawk County. 15. TERMINATION OF RESPONSIBILITY. The Contract shall be considered as completed and the Contractor released from further obligations except as to the requirements of 82 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION his bond, after the work has been completed and finally accepted and final estimates have been allowed and the completion report of the engineer has been filed and approved by the Council. 16. CITY'S LEGAL RIGHTS. The City shall not be precluded by any measurements, estimate, or certificate made, either before or after the completion and acceptance of the work and payment therefor, from showing the true amount and character of the work performed and materials furnished by the Contractor, or from showing that any such measurement, estimate, or certificate is untrue or incorrectly made, or the work or materials do not, in fact, conform to the Contract. The City shall not be precluded, notwithstanding any such measurements, estimate, or certificate and payment in accordance therewith, from recovering from the Contractor and his surety such damages as it may sustain by reason of his failure to comply with the terms of the Contract. Neither the acceptance by the City or any of its representatives, nor any payment for or acceptance of the whole or any part of the work, nor any extension of time, nor any possession taken by the City, shall operate as a waiver on any portion of the contract or of any power herein reserved, or any right to damages herein provided. A waiver of any breach of the contract shall not be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. 83 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 1. SUBCONTRACTS The contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be inserted in all subcontracts relative to the work to require compliance by each subcontractor with the applicable provisions of the contract for the improvements embraced in this contract. 2. REVIEW BY THE CITY OF WATERLOO The City of Waterloo, its authorized representatives and agents, shall at all times have access to and be permitted to observe and review all work, materials, equipment, payrolls, personnel records, employment conditions, material invoices, and other relevant data and records pertaining to this contract, provided, however, that all instructions and approval with respect to the work will be given to the contractor only by the City of Waterloo through its authorized representative or agents. 3. INSPECTION a. The contractor shall furnish promptly all materials reasonably necessary for any tests, which may be required. All tests by the City of Waterloo will be performed in such manner as not to delay the work unnecessarily and will be made in accor- dance with the provisions of the Technical Specifications. b. Inspection of materials and appurtenances to be incorporated in the improvements embraced in this contract may be made at the place of production, manufacture or shipment, whenever the quantity justifies it, and such inspection and acceptance, unless otherwise stated in the Technical Specifications, shall be final, except as regards (1) latent defects, (2) departures from specific requirements of the contract, (3) damage or loss in transit, or (4) fraud or such gross mistakes as amount to fraud. Subject to the requirements contained in the preceding sentence, the inspection of materials as a whole or in part will be made at the project site. 4. WARRANTY OF TITLE No material, supplies, or equipment to be installed or furnished under this contract shall be purchased subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale, lease-purchase or other agreement by which an interest therein or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. The contractor shall warrant good title to all materials, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the work and upon completion of all work, shall deliver the same together with all improvements and appurtenances constructed or placed thereon by him to the City of Waterloo free from any claims, liens, or charges. Neither the contractor nor any person, firm, or corporation furnishing any material or labor for any work covered by this contract shall have any right to a lien upon any improvement or appurtenance thereon. Nothing contained in this paragraph, however, shall defeat or 84 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION impair the right of persons furnishing materials or labor to recover under any bond given by the contractor for their protection or any rights under any law permitting such persons to look to funds due the contractor in the hands of the City of Waterloo. The provisions of this paragraph shall be inserted in all subcontracts and material contracts and notice of its provisions shall be given to all persons furnishing materials for the work when no formal contract is entered into for such materials. 85 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION 86 SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION FORM OF CONTRACT CONTRACT FOR THE CONSTRUCTION OF F.Y.2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY CITY OF WATERLOO,IOWA CONTRACT NO. 905 This contract made and entered into this day of ,20_,by and between the City of Waterloo, Iowa, a Municipal Corporation, (hereinafter referred to as City), and of , (hereinafter referred to as Contractor), WITNESSETH: PAR. 1 Contractor agrees to build and construct the F.Y. 2017 CITY OF WATERLOO PERMEABLE ALLEY, Contract No. 905, and furnish all necessary tools, equipment, materials and labor necessary to do all the work called for in the plans and specifications in a workmanshiplike manner and for the prices set forth in Contractor's proposal, which was accepted by the City, and which is understood and agreed to be a part of this contract. PAR. 2 It is understood and agreed that the resolution adopted by the City Council ordering the construction of the improvement, the Notice to Contractors as published, the Instruction to Bidders, the Form of Proposal, the Construction and Maintenance Bonds, the Council Proceedings relating to this matter, and the Plans and Specifications shall all be considered as forming a part of the contract the same as though they were each set out in said contract. PAR. 3 The Contractor agrees to furnish at its own cost and expense, all necessary materials and labor for said work and to construct said improvements in a thorough, substantial, and workmanlike manner, and in strict accordance with the requirements of this contract, and of the plans and specifications made a part hereof by reference, and to the satisfaction and approval of the City and its engineer. PAR. 4 The Contractor agrees to perform said work and install said improvements on the terms set out in bid or proposal to the City which has been accepted by the City and which is by reference made a part of this contract. 87 FORM OF CONTRACT PAR. 5 The Contractor agrees to commence said work within ten (10) working days after receipt of "Notice to Proceed" and complete it on or before unless an extension of time is granted in writing by the Council of the City. PAR. 6 Should the Contractor fail to complete said improvements in strict accordance with the terms and conditions of this contract, or the plans and specifications therefor promptly by the date herein specified, the City may pay such additional sums as it may be required to pay by reason of the failure of said contractor and deduct any and all such sums from any amount then due the Contractor. PAR. 7 The Contractor agrees to comply with and obey all ordinances of the City of Waterloo, Iowa, relating to the obstruction of streets and alleys, keeping open passage ways for water,traffic, and protecting any excavations in any street or alley, and maintaining proper and sufficient barricades with lights and signals during all hours of darkness,to see that the backfilling is properly done, and agrees to keep the City whole and defend any and all suits that may be brought against the City by reason of any injuries that may be sustained by any person or property allegedly caused by the Contractor, or his agents, while work is done pursuant to this agreement. PAR. 8 The Contractor agrees that in the event a law suit is brought against the City for damages allegedly sustained by reason of any act, omission or negligence of the Contractor or its agents, or on account of any injuries allegedly sustained by reason of any obstruction, hole, depression or barrier placed or dug by the defendant or its agents, in the doing of the work herein contracted for,that it will defend said suit and save the City harmless therein, and in case judgment is rendered against the City,the Contractor agrees to pay the same promptly. The Contractor agrees to carry public liability insurance in a solvent company in a sufficient amount to protect the City and those who use the streets of the City. PAR. 9 The City shall have the right to appoint one or more construction reviewers who shall review the progress of the work in detail; also,to make any test or any material to be used in such work. No material shall be used in any work until the same has first been approved by the construction reviewer. Such construction reviewer shall have full authority to pass judgment upon all materials and upon the manner of doing the work, and their judgment on rejecting any materials, substance, or manner of work shall be final unless it is revoked or modified by the City Engineer. PAR. 10 Any material, which has been rejected by the construction reviewer, shall be at once removed from the line of work and shall not be again taken thereon or placed with the material proposed to be used without the written consent of the City Engineer. PAR. 11 The Contractor shall maintain no cause of action against the City on account of delays and prosecution of work, but if said work is delayed by the City, the 88 FORM OF CONTRACT Contractor shall have such extra time for completion of the job as was lost by reason of the delay caused by the City. PAR. 12 The Contractor agrees to pay punctually all just claims of labor, material, men, or subcontractors who shall perform labor or furnish materials entering into this improvement. It is agreed that the City need not pay the Contractor until all such claims are paid by the Contractor. It is agreed that the City shall not be liable for said labor,material,or men under this contract. PAR. 13 The Contractor agrees to furnish the City, simultaneously with this contract, a bond on a form to be provided by the City in the amount provided by law as stated in the Notice to Bidders, which shall be for the benefit of the City, and any and all persons injured by the breach of any of the terms of this contract. Said bond shall be filed with the City Clerk and shall be subject to the approval of the City Council, and is by reference made a part of this contract. PAR. 14 The Contractor agrees that should it abandon work under this contract or cease the prosecution thereof for a period of thirty (30) consecutive days without reasonable cause, and should it fail to proceed with said work within ten(10) days after a notice to continue or carry it on has been mailed to it at the address given herein by the City, or after such notice has been served on it, then the City may proceed to complete said work, using any material, tools, or machinery found along said line of work, doing the work either by contract or as it may elect, and the Contractor and the sureties on its bond shall be liable to the City for the costs and expenses so paid out. Said costs shall be retained by the City from any compensation due, or to become due the Contractor, and may be recovered by the City in an action upon Contractor's bond. PAR. 15 In consideration of the full compliance on the part of the Contractor with all the provisions, stipulations, and conditions hereof, or contained in the various instruments made a part of this contract by reference, and upon completion and acceptance of said work, the City agrees to pay to the Contractor, in the manner set out in the Notice to Contractors, the amount of money due the Contractor for work performed and accepted, at the unit prices set out in the Contractor's proposal, which has been accepted by the City. PAR. 16 The total amount of the contract, based on the Engineer's estimates of quantities and the Contractor's unit bid prices, and for which 100% surety bond is required is PAR. 17 After the completion of said work, the Contractor agrees to remove all debris and clean up said streets, and to save the City harmless from any damage allegedly resulting from a failure to clean up and remove the debris or put the street back in a proper condition for travel. 89 FORM OF CONTRACT PAR. 18 This contract is not divisible, but in the event of a conflict between this contract and the various instruments incorporated by reference,this contract shall govern. PAR. 19 Before the Contractor shall be entitled to receive fmal payment for work done under this contract, it shall execute and file a bond in the penal sum of not less than 100% of the total amount of the contract, same to be known as "Maintenance Bond," and which bond must be approved by the City Council, and which bond is in addition to the bond given by the Contractor to guarantee the completion of the work. PAR. 20 The Contractor shall maintain all work done hereunder in good order for the period of two (2) years from and after the date it is accepted by the Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa. Said maintenance shall be made without expense to the City or the abutting property. In the event of the failure or default of the Contractor to remedy any or all defects appearing in said work within a period of two (2) years from the date of its acceptance by said Council, and after having been given ten (10) days notice so to do by registered letter deposited in the United States Post Office in said town, addressed to said contractor at the address herein given, then the City may proceed to remedy such defects. The costs and expenses thereof to be recovered from the Contractor and the sureties on its maintenance bond by an action brought in any court of competent jurisdiction. PAR. 21 The Contractor shall give notice to said City by registered letter directed to the Mayor or City Clerk/Auditor thereof not more than four (4) and not less than three (3)months prior to the expiration of the term during which the Contractor is required to maintain said improvements, in good repair by the terms of its Contract. The liability of the Contractor and of the sureties on its bond for maintenance of the said improvements shall continue until three (3) months after such notice has been given to the City, and, in any event,until two(2)years after the acceptance of the work. CITY OF WATERLOO, IOWA Mayor City Clerk 90 FORM OF CONTRACT Contractor BY: Title: Approved by the City Council of the City of Waterloo, Iowa,this day of , 20 . ATTEST: , City Clerk Waterloo,Iowa 91 FORM OF CONTRACT 92 FORM OF CONTRACT PERFORMANCE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, of (the"Principal"), and of (the"Surety"), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Waterloo, Iowa (the"Obligee"), in the penal sum of Dollars($ ), lawful money of the United States, for the payment of said sum in connection with a contract(the"Contract")dated on or about for the purpose of . The Contract is incorporated herein by reference as though fully set forth herein. Whenever the Principal shall be and is declared by the Obligee to be in default under the Contract, with the Obligee having performed its obligations in the Contract, then the Surety, acknowledging that time is of the essence,may promptly remedy the default,or shall promptly undertake to: 1. Complete the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions; or 2. Obtain one or more bids for completing the Contract in accordance with its terms and conditions, and upon determination by the Surety of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, or, if the Obligee elects, upon determination by the Obligee and the Surety jointly of the lowest responsible bidder, or negotiated proposal, arrange for a contract between such party and the Obligee. The Surety will make available as work progresses sufficient funds to pay the cost of completion less the balance of the Contract price. The cost of completion includes responsibilities of the Principal for correction of defective work and completion of the Contract, the Obligee's legal and design professional costs resulting directly from the Principal's default, and liquidated damages or actual damages if no liquidated damages are specified in the Contract. The term "balance of the Contract price" means the total amount payable by the Obligee to the Principal under the Contract and any amendments thereto, less the amount properly paid by the Obligee to the Principal; or 3. Determine the amount for which it is liable to the Obligee and pay the Obligee that amount as soon as practicable. In the event this bond is enforced, Principal and Surety agree to indemnify Obligee and hold Obligee harmless from and against any and all costs of enforcement, including but not limited to reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. Every Surety on this bond shall be deemed and held, any contract to the contrary notwithstanding, to consent to each and all of the following matters,without notice: 1. To any extension of time to the Contract in which to perform the Contract. 93 PERFORMANCE BOND 2. To any change in the plans, specifications, or Contract when such change does not involve an increase of more than twenty percent (20%) of the total Contract price, and shall then be released only as to such excess increase. 3. That no provision of this bond or of any other contract shall be valid which limits to less than one(1)year from the time of the acceptance of the work the right to sue on this bond for defect in workmanship or material not discovered or known to the Obligee at the time such work was accepted. If the Principal performs the Contract, then this bond shall be null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. In no event shall the Surety's total obligation exceed the penal amount of this bond. Terms used herein shall include, as appropriate, the singular or plural number, or the masculine, feminine or neuter gender. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the undersigned Principal and Surety have executed this Performance Bond as of PRINCIPAL SURETY Name Name By: By: Title: Title: [attach Power of Attorney] NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. If this project includes Federal Funds,the following applies to the payment bond: IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list(Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the State where the project is located. 94 PERFORMANCE BOND PAYMENT BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: that (Name of Contractor) (Address of Contractor) a , hereinafter called Principal, (Corporation,Partnership or Individual) and (Name of Surety) (Address of Surety) hereinafter called Surety, are held and firmly bound unto (Name of Owner) (Address of Owner) hereinafter called OWNER, in the penal sum of Dollars, $( ) in lawful money of the United States, for the payment of which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, successors, and assigns,jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION is such that whereas, the Principal entered into a certain contract'with the OWNER, dated the day of 20 , a copy of which is hereto attached and made a part hereof for the construction of: NOW, THEREFORE, if the Principal shall promptly make payment to all persons, firms, SUBCONTRACTORS, and corporations furnishing materials for or performing labor in the prosecution of the WORK provided for in such contract, and any authorized extension or modification thereof, including all amounts due for materials, lubricants, oil, gasoline, coal and coke, repairs on machinery, equipment and tools, consumed or used in connection with the construction of such WORK, and all insurance premiums on said WORK, and for all labor, performed in such WORK whether by SUBCONTRACTOR or otherwise, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. 95 PAYMENT BOND PROVIDED, FURTHER,that the said Surety for value received hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK to be performed thereunder or the SPECIFICATIONS accompanying the same shall in any wise affect its obligation on this BOND, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the WORK or to the SPECIFICATIONS. PROVIDED, FURTHER, that no final settlement between the OWNER and the CONTRACTOR shall abridge the right of any beneficiary hereunder, whose claim may be unsatisfied. IN WITNESS HEREOF, this instrument is executed in counterparts, each one of (number) which shall be deemed an original,this the day of 20 ATTEST: Principal (Principal)Secretary (SEAL) By (s) (Address) Witness as to Principal (Address) Surety ATTEST: By Attorney-in-Fact Witness as to Surety (Address) (Address) NOTE: Date of BOND must not be prior to date of Contract. If CONTRACTOR is Partnership, all partners should execute BOND. If this project includes Federal Funds,the following applies to the payment bond:: IMPORTANT: Surety companies executing bonds must appear on the Treasury Department's most current list(Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the State where the project is located. 96 PAYMENT BOND Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade,and Subbase EARTHWORK,SUBGRADE,AND SUBBASE PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A.Clearing and Grubbing B.Earthwork. Excavation,and Embankment Construction C. Subgrade Preparation D. Subbase Construction E.Topsoil 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Excavate and construct embankments,subgrades,and subbases. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: Submit result;of Standard Proctor and in-place density tests on compactions when required. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS If impractical,or if scheduling does not allow the removal of utilities before excavation,work around the utilities. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Clearing and Grubbing by Units: The quantity of clearing and grubbing will be the quantity, in units,shown in the contract documents. 1. Measurement: a. Trees 6 inches in diameter or greater will be counted and the circumference will be measured at a height of 18 inches above the ground.The diameter will be calculated by measuring the circumference to the nearest inch and dividing by 3.14. See Table 2010.01 for identification of units per tree for clearing,grubbing,and clearing and grubbing. b. Stumps 6 inches in diameter or greater will be counted and the diameter,in inches,calculated by determining the average diameter at cutoff. See Table 2010.01 for identification of units per stump fir grubbing. c. Logs and down timber 6 inches in diameter or greater will be measured at a point 18 inches from the end of the log with greatest diameter or 18 inches from the base of the tree for down timber for clearing. d. Hedge rows will be measured in linear feet and converted to units using a rate of 30 units per 100 linear feet of hedge row. e. Brush will be measured in square feet and converted to units by using a rate of 0.8 units per 100 square feet of brush. f. Growing corn will be measured in square feet and converted to units by using a rate of 0.2 units per 100 square feet of growing corn. g. Vegetation removal will not be measured for payment. 2010-pg1 Standard Specifications Division 2-Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade,and Subbase h. Field fence removal,included in clearing and grubbing,will be measured in stations and converted to units at a rate of 6.0 units per station of fence. For each tree or stump counted as identified in Items a,b,and c,units will be determined as identified in the following table: Table 2010.01: Tabulation of Units for Removal of Trees and Stumps Unit Size Diameter Clearing Grubbing Clearing and Grubbing Over 6 in.to 9 in. incl. 1.1 2.8 3.9 Over 9 in.to 12 in.incl. 1.9 4.8 6.7 Over 12 in.to 15 in. incl. 2.8 6.6 9.4 Over 15 in.to 18 in.incl. 4.7 8.8 13.5 Over 18 in.to 24 in.incl. 8.4 13.6 22.0 Over 24 in.to 30 in.incl. 11.4 17.6 29.0 Over 30 in.to 36 in.incl. 22.0 28.0 50.0 Over 36 in.to 42 in. incl. 30.0 50.0 80.0 Over 42 in.to 48 in. incl. 40.0 80.0 120.0 Over 48 in.to 60 in. incl. 60.0 100.0 160.0 Over 60 in.to 72 in. incl. 80.0 120.0 200.0 Over 72 in. 120.0 160.0 280.0 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per unit. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,placement of backfill in area where roots have been removed,and removal and disposal of all materials. B. Clearing and Grubbing by Area: 1. Measurement:Measurement will be the area in acres based on the area shown in the contract documents,computed from a need line,or computed from a right-of-way line if the limits are not shown for this item in the contract documents. 2. Payment:Payment will be at the unit price per acre. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal and disposal of all materials and placement of backfill in area where roots have been removed. C. Clearing and Grubbing by Lump Sum: 1. Measurement:Lump sum item;no measurement will be made. 2. Payment: Payment will be the contract lump sum price. D. Topsoil: 1. On-site Topsoil: a. Measurement: Measurement will be in cubic yards of topsoil stripped,salvaged,and spread,and will be computed on the basis of a uniform 8 inch finished thickness,or as specified. b. Payment: 1) Payment will be at the unit price per cubic yard. 2) Topsoil salvaged from excavated areas and paid as topsoil will not be included in excavation quantities for which payment is made. 3) Overhaul will not be paid. 2. Compost-amended Topsoil: a. Measurement: Measurement will be the same as for on-site topsoil. b. Payment: Payment will be the unit price per cubic yard. c. Includes: This work includes,but is not limited to,furnishing and incorporating compost. 3. Off-site Topsoil: 2010- pg2 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase a. Measurement: Measurement will be in cubic yards for furnishing,excavating, hauling,and incorporating the material. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per cubic yard. E. Class 10, Class 12,or Class 13 Excavation: 1. Measurement: a. Measurement for Class 10,Class 12,and Class 13 material excavated from the project site and borrow areas will be the plan quantity in cubic yards,without final field measurement.Adjustments may be made to the plan quantities if agreed to by both the Engineer and the Contractor. b. If either the Contractor or the Engineer desires actual measurements rather than using contract document quantities,that party must provide written notice to the other party prior to starting work. 1) If actual measurements are used,use cross-section surveys by the Engineer before and after work for the basis of computing the cubic yards of excavation. The extra survey cost will be paid by the party requesting the survey. 2) When the Engineer determines it is impractical to make cross-section surveys, use the truck count method,with a shrinkage factor,resulting in volume per truck type and size determined by the Engineer.Unless otherwise specified,use a shrinkage factor of 1.35 for Class 10 and Class 13 excavation.No shrinkage factor will be used for Class 12. 2. Payment: a. Payment will be at the unit price per cubic yard. b. Payment will not be made for excavation work done prior to the staking and,if necessary,cross-sectioning. 3 Includes,but is not limited to: a. Site preparation for,and the construction of,embankment, fills, shoulder backfill,and backfill behind curbs. b. Overhaul. c. Finishing the soil surface,including roadways,shoulders,behind curbs, side ditches, slopes,and borrow pits. d. Repair or replacement of any fences that have been unnecessarily damaged or removed. e. Compaction testing,as specified in the contract documents. 4. Does not include: Stripping,salvaging,and spreading 8 inches of topsoil,unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. F. Below Grade Excavation(Core Out): If unsuitable or unstable soil is encountered below the 12 inches of subgrade,measurement and payment for removal and replacement of such materials is as follows: 1. Measurement: Will be measured and paid as extra work,unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2. Payment: To be considered for payment,the Engineer must order the removal and replacement of the material.Payment will be considered only in previously undisturbed areas and not in existing embankments or following proof rolling operations. 3. Includes: Payment includes,but is not limited to,equipment,tools,labor,disposal of unsuitable materials,dewatering,drying,furnishing,and placement of foundation materials as required by the Engineer,compaction and finishing of the excavated area, and al] incidental work as may be required. G. Subgrade Preparation: 1. Measurement: The area of the proposed pavement under which the subgrade preparation is performed,plus 2 feet on each side,will be measured in square yards. 2010-pg3 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade,and Subbase 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard. 3. Includes: Work includes,but is not limited to,excavating,manipulating,replacing, compacting,and trimming to the proper grade. H. Subgrade Treatment: 1. Measurement: The area of the proposed pavement under which subgrade treatment is provided,plus 2 feet on each side,will be measured in square yards. 2. Payment: a. Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for each type used. b. Payment is in addition to subgrade preparation. 3. Includes: Work includes,but is not limited to,furnishing,placing,and incorporating the subgrade treatment material[cement,asphalt, fly ash,lime,geogrid(type),or geotextiles]. I Subbase: 1. Measurement: The area of the proposed pavement under which subbase is provided, plus 2 feet on each side,will be measured in square yards. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard. 3. Includes: Work includes,but is not limited to,furnishing,placing,compacting,and to the proper grade. J. Removals: 1. Structures: a. Measurement: Each specified structure removed will be counted. b. Payment:Payment will be at the unit price for each specified structure removed. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal and disposal of structures. 2. Culverts: a. Known Box Culverts: 1) Measurement: Each type and size of box culvert removed will be measured in linear feet from end to end along the centerline of the flowline. 2) Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of box culvert removed. 3) Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal and disposal of box culverts. b. Unknown Box Culverts: Removal of unknown box culverts will be measured and paid as extra work. c. Known Pipe Culverts: 1) Measurement: Each type and size of pipe culvert removed will be measured in linear feet from end to end at the flowline. 2) Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe culvert removed. 3) Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal and disposal of pipe culverts. d. Unknown Pipe Culverts: Removal of unknown pipe culverts will be measured and paid as extra work. 3. Pipes and Conduits: a. Known Pipes and Conduits: 1) Measurement: Each type and size of pipe and conduit removed will be measured in linear feet from end to end. 2010-pg4 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase 2) Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe and conduit removed. 3) Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal,disposal,and plugging,if specified,of pipes and conduits. 4) Abandoned Private Utilities: Removal of all private utility lines is the responsibility of the respective utility agency,and will not be measured or paid. b. Unknown Pipes and Conduits:Removal of unknown pipes and conduits will be measured and paid as extra work. 4. Pavement: Comply with Section 7040. K. Filling and Plugging of Pipe Culverts,Pipes,and Conduits: 1. Known pipe culverts,pipes,and conduits: a. Measurement:Each type and size of pipe culvert,pipe,and conduit filled and plugged will be measured in linear feet from end to end. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe culvert,pipe,and conduit filled and plugged. c. Abandoned Private Utilities: Filling and plugging of all private utility lines is the responsibility of the respective utility agency,and will not be measured or paid. 2. Unknown pipe culverts,pipes,and conduits: Filling and plugging of unknown pipe culverts,pipes,and conduits will be measured and paid as extra work. L. Compaction Testing: 1. The Contractor will not be responsible for compaction testing or payment unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2. If the contract documents specify that the Contractor is responsible for compaction testing,performed by an independent testing laboratory hired by the Contractor, measurement and payment will be as follows: a. Measurement:Lump sum item;no measurement will be made. b. Payment:Payment will be the contract lump sum price. 3. The Contractor will be responsible for payments associated with all retesting resulting from failure of initial tests. 2010-pg5 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade,and Subbase PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TOPSOIL Use suitable topsoil of uniform quality,free from hard clods,roots,sod,stiff clay,hard pan, stones larger than 1 inch(1/2 inch for turfgrass seeding),lime cement,ash,slag,concrete,tar residue, tarred paper,boards,chips,sticks,or any undesirable material. Use on-site topsoil,unless compost-amended or off-site topsoil is specified. A. On-site Topsoil: On-site topsoil material is material excavated from the top 12 inches of the site.Use of on-site topsoil material is subject to the Engineer's approval. B. Compost-amended On-site Topsoil: Amend low-quality on-site topsoil,not meeting the requirements specified for off-site topsoil,with a minimum of 1 inch of compost for every 3 inches of topsoil.Use compost meeting the requirements of mulch for pneumatic seeding in Section 9010,2.07. C. Off-site Topsoil: Contains at least 3%organic matter,according to ASTM D 2974,has a high degree of fertility,is free of herbicides that prohibit plant growth,has a pH level between 6.0 and 8.0,and meets the following mechanical analysis requirements: Sieve Percent Passing 1" 100 '/2" 95*to 97* 40 to 60 No. 100 40 to 60 No.200 10 to 30 *100%for turfgrass The Engineer will approve the source of off-site topsoil. Surface soils from ditch bottoms, drained ponds,and eroded areas,or soils that are supporting growth of noxious weeds or other undesirable vegetation,will not be accepted.The Engineer will determine if testing is necessary.The Contractor will be responsible for payment of the testing if the off-site topsoil does not meet the above requirements. If the testing verifies the off-site topsoil does meet the above requirements,payment for the testing will be the responsibility of the Jurisdiction. 2.02 EXCAVATION MATERIALS All project site and borrow excavation will be classified as Class 10,Class 12,or Class 13 as defined below,and as indicated in the contract documents. A. Class 10 Excavation: 1. Class 10 excavation includes all normal soil such as loam,silt,gumbo,peat,clay, soft shale, sand,and gravel.It includes fragmentary rock handled in the manner normal to this class of excavation. 2. Includes any combination of the above described materials and any other material not classified as Class 12 or Class 13. B. Class 12 Excavation: 1. Material deposits so firmly cemented together that they cannot be removed without continuous use of pneumatic tools or blasting. 2. Class 12 excavation includes the actual measured volume of granite,trap,quartzite, chert,limestone, sandstone,hard shale,or slate in natural ledges or displaced masses. 3. Also includes the estimated or measured volume of rock fragments or boulders that occur on the surface or in subsurface deposits mixed with soil, sand,or gravel when their size, number,or location prevents them from being handled in a manner normal to Class 10 excavation. 2010-pg6 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase C. Class 13 Excavation: 1. Class 13 excavation includes all materials listed under the definitions of Classes 10 and 12,and any other material encountered,regardless of its nature. 2. This classification covers work commonly referred to as"unclassified excavation." 3. The contract documents will specify the limits for Class 13 excavation.Excavation within these limits will not be classified as Class 10 or Class 12 excavation. D. Unsuitable or Unstable Materials: 1. Material encountered during excavation above or below grade that does not meet the suitable soil requirements in Section 2010,2.03. 2. Rubbish and debris, including trees,stumps,waste construction materials,scrap metals, and other materials that cannot be buried or used for backfill or topsoil. 3. Moisture content does not determine suitability of materials. E. Borrow: Unless otherwise provided in the contract documents,when the quantity of fill material required is not available within the limits of the project cross-sections or specific borrow areas as indicated,the Contractor should make up the deficiency from borrow areas provided by the Engineer,or furnish equivalent material from other borrow areas. 2.03 SUITABLE EMBANKMENT MATERIALS Meet the following requirements for all soils provided for the construction of embankments: A. Density of 95 pcf or greater according to ASTM D 698 or AASHTO T 99(Standard Proctor Density). B. AASHTO M 145 index of less than 30. C. Liquid limit(LL)less than 50. D. Soils not meeting these requirements are considered unsuitable soils,regardless of classification. E. For soils to be placed below water,use clean granular material. 2.04 FOUNDATION MATERIALS A. Select Subgrade Materials: 1. All soils required for select subgrade materials must be approved by the Engineer. Approval of materials and their use will be based on AASHTO M 145. a. Cohesive soils must meet all of the following requirements: 1) 45%or less silt size fraction. 2) Density of 110 pcf or greater according to ASTM D 698 or AASHTO T 99 (Standard Proctor Density). 3) Plasticity index greater than 10. 4) A-6 or A-7-6 soils of glacial origin. b. Granular soils must meet all of the following requirements: 1) Density of 110 pcf or greater according to ASTM D 698 or AASHTO T 99 (Standard Proctor Density). 2) 15%or less silt and clay. 3) Plasticity index of 3 or less. 4) A-1,A-2,or A-3 (0). 2. Crushed stone,crushed PCC,crushed composite pavement,or RAP;mixtures of gravel, sand,and soil;or uniformly-blended combinations of the above;as approved by the Engineer. 3. The Engineer may authorize a change in select subgrade materials subject to materials available locally at time of construction. 2010- pg7 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase B. Granular Stabilization Materials: 1. Clean,crushed stone or crushed concrete,with the following gradation: Sieve Percent Passing 2 '/z" 100 2" 90 to 100 1 '/2" 35 to 70 1" 0 to 20 '/z" 0to5 2. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation,subject to materials available locally at time of construction. C. Subgrade Treatment: 1. Cement: Meet the requirements of AASHTO M 85 for portland cement. 2. Asphalt: Meet the requirements of AASHTO M 140. 3. Fly ash: a. Meet requirements of ASTM C 618 or AASHTO M 295. b. Either Class C or Class F.For Class C,the pozzolanic activity test with lime will not be required. c. Approval of source required. 4. Lime: Hydrated lime should meet requirements of ASTM C 207,Type N or AASHTO M 216,and others. 5. Geogrid: a. Rectangular or Square: Use an integrally-formed grid structure manufactured of a stress-resistant polypropylene material.Use Type 1 geogrid,unless Type 2 is specified.Meet the following minimum physical properties: Table 2010.02: Geogrid(Rectangular or Square) Property Test Method Units Type 11 Type 2 Aperture stability modulus at 20 kg-cm Kinney2-01 kg-cm/deg 3.2 6.5 Minimum true initial modulus in use Machine direction(MD) 15,080 32,890 Cross Machine direction(CMD) ASTM D 6637 lb/ft 20,560 44,725 Tensile strength,2%strain CMD ASTM D 6637 lb/ft 380 590 Junction efficiency GRI-GG2-87 % 93 93 Flexural rigidity ASTM D 1388 Mg-cm 250,000 750,000 Aperture size Minimum 0.5 0.5 Maximum N/A In. 2.0 2.0 Geogrids meeting the requirements of Iowa DOT Article 4196.01,B and Materials LM.496.01 will be acceptable. 2 Dr.Thomas C.Kinney,P.E.and US Army Corps of Engineers. b. Triangular:Use punched and drawn polypropylene that is oriented in three substantially equilateral directions.Meet the following minimum physical properties: 2010-pg8 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase Table 2010.03: Geogrid(Triangular) Property Test Method Units Type 3 Type 4 Aperture stability modulus at 5 kg-cm Kinney'-01 kg-cm/deg 3.0 3.6 Resistance to loss of load capacity Chemical resistance EPA 9090 Immersion % 90-100 90-100 Ultra-violet light and weathering ASTM D 4355 (500 hrs) Junction efficiency GRI-GG2-87 %of ultimate GRI-GG1-87 tensile strength 93 93 Radial stiffness ASTM D 6637 lb/ft @ 0.5% 15,000 20,000 strain Rib Patch Longitudinal. Diagonal N/A in. 1.5-1.75 1.5-1.75 Mid-rib depth N/A in. 0.04-0.06 0.05-0.08 Mid-rib width N/A in. 0.035-0.05 0.035-0.055 Dr.Thomas C.Kinney.P.E.and US Army Corps of Engineers. 6. Geol:extiles:Use a woven or non-woven permeable fabric,manufactured of polymer fibers,meeting the requirements of ASTM D 4439. D. Subbase:. 1. Special Backfill: a. Comply with Iowa DOT Specifications Section 4132.The quality requirements of Iowa DOT Materials I.M.210 for recycled pavements are waived. b. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation subject to materials available locally at time of construction. 2. Granular Subbase: a. Comply with Iowa DOT Specifications Section 4121. b. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation subject to materials available locally at time of construction. 3. Modified Subbase: a. Comply with Iowa DOT Specifications Section 4123. b. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation,subject to materials available locally at time of construction. 2010-pg9 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Notification:Notify the Engineer prior to start of clearing and grubbing activities. B. Tree Cutting: 1. October 1 through March 31:No restrictions on tree cutting. 2. April 1 through September 30: Cut trees only after authorized by the Engineer and upon receiving a copy of the Determination of Effect indicating no affect to threatened or endangered species is expected within the work area. C. Removal: Remove the following items: 1. Trees and stumps,including roots,to a depth of at least 12 inches.Place backfill to fill the hole. 2. Logs and downed timber. 3. fledge rows,brush,field fence,and agricultural products. 4. Vegetation and rubbish. 5. Other objectionable materials. D. Disposal: Material from clearing and grubbing may be removed according to Iowa Code 335 and must meet local ordinance. 1. Process by chipping logs,downed timber,or brush for mulching material;or salvage logs and downed timber for firewood. 2. Other vegetation,including corn stubble,may be disked into the existing soil if approved by the Engineer. 3. Haul vegetative materials from clearing and grubbing that are not handled on the project to a yard waste disposal site. 4. Remove field fence and other non-vegetative materials from the project. 3.02 STRIPPING,SALVAGING,AND SPREADING TOPSOIL A. Stripping and Salvaging Topsoil: 1. Mow all weeds,grass,and growing crops or other herbaceous vegetation close to the ground and remove from the site. Shred sod by shallow plowing or blading and thorough disking.Thoroughly shred to allow the soil to be easily spread in a thin layer over areas to be covered.If allowed by the Engineer,herbicides may be applied,and vegetation may be incorporated into the topsoil. 2. Remove an adequate amount of topsoil from the upper 12 inches of existing on-site topsoil to allow finish grading with a finished grade of 8 inches of salvaged or amended topsoil.The topsoil may be moved directly to an area where it is to be used,or may be stockpiled for future use. B. Preparation for Topsoil Placement: 1. Finish excavation and embankment work according to the specified grades and crosssections;grade and slope all surfaces to drain away from buildings and prevent ponding.Conform to the grading plan within+2 inches. 2. Loosen surface to a minimum depth of 4 inches to reduce compaction. C. Topsoil Spreading and Finish Grading: 1. Place the topsoil after all grading and trenching activities in the area have been completed. 2010-pg10 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase 2. Place topsoil at least 8 inches deep; smooth and finished grade according to the contract documents.If topsoil is being amended with compost,thoroughly blend compost with onsite topsoil at the rate specified in Section 2010,2.01. 3. After finish grading the topsoil,remove clods,lumps,roots,litter,other undesirable material,or stones larger than 1 inch(1/2 inch for turfgrass). 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Notification:Notify the Engineer prior to start of excavation activities. B. Pavement Removal: 1. Cut surface pavement to full depth as required,and at designated removal lines. 2. Remove all pavement materials. a. If specified in the contract documents or allowed by the Engineer,process for re-use. b. Dispose of excess material as follows: 1) Use as unsuitable soil according to this section. 2) If specified in the contract documents,deliver and stockpile at a site designated by the Engineer. 3) Otherwise,properly dispose of off-site. 3. Remove pavement material broken or damaged by the Contractor beyond designated removal lines to new line designated by the Engineer,and replaced at the ContractorC s expense. 4. Protect subgrade beneath existing pavement removal areas. C. Excavation: Perform Class 10, 12,or 13 grading,as specified in the contract documents,to the prescribed grade. D. Shaping of Borrows: 1. Ensure that borrow areas provided by the Contractor are regular in cross-section to allow accurate measurement. 2. Ensure that care is taken to blend to natural land forms and avoid unnecessary damage to the land. 3. Do not divert natural drainage of surface water onto adjoining owners,and be diligent in draining the surface water in its natural course or channel. 4. Complete excavation in a way consistent with the existing natural drainage conditions. E. Drainage: 1. Provide temporary drainage facilities to prevent damage to public or private interests when necessary to interrupt natural drainage or flow of artificial drains. 2. Restore original drainage as soon as work allows. 3. The Contractor is responsible for damage resulting from their neglect to provide erosion control or artificial drainage. F. Unsuitable or Unstable Materials: 1. Remove unsuitable or unstable materials to a depth specified in the contract documents, or as directed by the Engineer. 2. The Engineer will determine the need for and type of backfill material, including select soil or granular subbase. 3. Remove all soft areas.Replace with approved materials. 4. If subbase materials are used,provide weight tickets at the time of delivery. 2010-pg11 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade,and Subbase 5. Dispose of unsuitable or unstable materials according to the requirements in this section. G. Removal of Boulders:Remove all boulders with a minimum diameter of 6 inches. H. Rock Excavation: 1. When excavation to the subgrade elevation results in a surface consisting of loose or solid rock: a. Excavate 1 foot below the finished subgrade elevation. b. Construct subgrade with suitable material. c. Conduct operations so the Engineer is given the opportunity to measure cross-section before placement of subgrade material. 2. When pre-splitting of rock cuts is nexessary,the limits of the area and the procedure used will be subject to the approval of the Engineer. 3. Dispose of rocks and boulders 6 inches in diameter and greater off-site. I. Removal or Filling of Pipe Culverts,Pipes,and Conduits: Remove,plug,and/or fill with flowable mortar,as directed by the Engineer. 3.04 EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION A. Notification:Notify the Engineer prior to start of embankment activities. B. Site Preparation: 1. Remove all ground cover from the area. 2. When an embankment is placed on or against an existing slope that is steeper than 3:1 and is more than 10 feet high, cut the slope into steps as the construction of the new embankment progresses.The steps should ensure that all sod or other potential sliding surfaces are removed. Cut each step or series of steps to approximate horizontal planes which have vertical slope dimensions of at least 3 feet. C. Depositing Embankment Material: 1. Except for rock fills and granular blankets,deposit embankment material in horizontal layers no greater than 8 inches in loose thickness.Do not incorporate vegetative materials in embankments. If some otherwise suitable soil contains small amounts of vegetative materials,such soils may be deposited outside of the shoulder line,within the outer 3 feet of the embankment. 2. When the width at the attained height is 30 feet or more,divide the area upon which the layer is to be placed into separate and distinct dump areas,having widths of at least 15 feet.If hauling equipment is operated within a dump area,cover the area with at least one passage of a tandem-axle disk,or two passages with a single-axle disk,prior to compaction. 3. Keep hauling equipment off dump areas of embankments 36 feet or more in width during compaction operations.Within 36 feet of a bridge or other limiting structure,or where the width of the embankment is less than 36 feet at the attained height,empty hauling units may travel on the dump area during compaction operations,as necessary to pass loaded hauling units.If the design width of the embankment is less than 30 feet at the attained height,hauling units will be allowed to travel through areas where compaction operations are in progress.When any hauling equipment is allowed to pass through compaction operations,do not require water,disking,and compacting equipment to deviate from their intended paths. 4. Deposit the material over the dump area as a separate and distinct operation. If the material,as deposited,contains an average of more than one lump per square yard, large enough to have at least one dimension greater than 12 inches,cover the area by at least one passage of a tandem-axle disk,or two passages of a single-axle disk.Use a disk that is designed and operated to cut and stir to the full depth of the layer. 2010-pg12 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase 5. After depositing and disking,if required,smooth the material to a uniform depth with a suitable motor patrol,bulldozer,or self-propelled sheepsfoot-type roller with a blade attachment.In addition to the initial smoothing operation,continue this smoothing and leveling of the lift during compaction,as necessary to provide a surface area free from ruts and other objectionable irregularities. Use the self-propelled sheepsfoot-type roller(meeting the requirements of Iowa DOT Article 2001.05)under the following conditions: a. Leveling must be done according to the prescribed rolling pattern. b. Compaction should be the primary function of the unit. c. Prevent spinning of the power drums. d. When,in the opinion of the Engineer,the unit cannot satisfactorily accomplish both reveling and rolling,use a separate dozer or motor patrol for the leveling operation prior to initiation of compaction. e. For embankments constructed primarily of sand or other granular material,the Contractor may substitute a pneumatic-tired roller meeting the requirements of Iowa DOT Article 2001.05. 6. Keep the outer portion of an embankment lower than its center,and wherever construction will be suspended for a period during which rain is likely to occur,roughen the surface to prevent erosion. This can be done by tracking, disking,or scarifying. Stones 6 inches and smaller in diameter may be placed in embankments,but distributed to avoid pockets.No stones larger than 3 inches may be placed within 1 foot of the finished subgrade elevation. D. Compaction with Moisture and Density Control: Compact with moisture and density control,unless Type A compaction is specified in the contract documents. See Section 2010, 3.09 for moisture and density requirements. E. Type A Compaction: When Type A compaction is specified in the contract documents, compact as follows: 1. After the surface layer has been smoothed,and before material for the next layer is deposited on it,compact the layer with at least one passage of the sheepsfoot-type roller per inch of loose thickness of the layer,until the roller is supported entirely on its feet. The roller will be considered to be supported entirely on its feet when the tamping feet penetrate no more than 3 inches into an 8 inch lift or layer being compacted. 2. Determine if moisture content of the material is excessive or suitable for satisfactory compaction. a. Start rolling operations immediately after the smoothing operation,or delay them,and instead aerate the material in preparation for rolling. b. Perform aeration and compaction operations without unnecessary delay. c. Rolling operations made prior to any aeration operations for a lift will not be counted as any of the required coverages. 3. If the material is dry to the extent that it will not likely be satisfactorily compacted by rolling,moisten the material. a. The Engineer may order the material to be moistened uniformly before it is compacted. b. The Engineer may authorize the use of water in the final finishing of the roadbed. c. Delays from the ordering of moistening or drying will be at the Contractor's expense. 4. The Contractor may substitute compaction with moisture and density control for Type A Compaction,providing all testing as required,at the Contractor's expense. 3.05 USE OF UNSUITABLE SOILS Unsuitable souls are not allowed in the right-of-way,unless otherwise specified in the contract documents or allowed by the Engineer. 2010-pg13 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase 3.06 SUBGRADE PREPARATION Shape and consolidate subgrade in preparation for the placement of pavement. A. Uniform Composition: Provide uniform composition of at least 12 inches below top of subgrade under new paving or subbase,plus 2 feet on each side.Use select subgrade materials unless granular stabilization materials or subgrade treatment is specified. 1. Subgrade Compaction in Fill Sections: a. Follow the compaction with moisture and density control requirements in Section 2010,3.04. b. Construct in two 6 inch lifts. 2. Subgrade Compaction in Cut Sections: a. Excavate and stockpile the top 6 inches of subgrade. b. Scarify,mix,and re-compact the next 6 inches of subgrade. c. Replace,mix,and compact the top 6 inches of subgrade. 3. Remove stones over 3 inches from subgrade. 4. Construct to elevation and cross-section such that,after rolling,surface will be above required subgrade elevation. B. Subgrade Stability: 1. Perform proof rolling with a truck loaded to the maximum single legal axle gross weight of 20,000 pounds or the maximum tandem axle gross weight of 34,000 pounds. Operate trucks at less than 10 mph.Make multiple passes for every lane.The subgrade will be considered to be unstable if,under the operation of the loaded truck,the surface shows yielding(soil wave in front of the loaded tires)or rutting of more than 2 inches,measured from the top to the bottom of the rut at the outside edges. 2. If soft or yielding areas are located,remove unstable materials and replace with suitable foundation materials as approved by the Engineer,meeting Section 2010,2.03. Compact subgrade materials in cut sections as required by the Engineer. If stabilization material is used,place and compact as required for subbase. B. Final Subgrade: Complete final subgrade by excavation to grade by use of steel-shod template supported on side forms, support rollers,or by use of an automatically-controlled subgrade excavating machine. C. Subgrade Check: Check subgrade elevation and grade by method approved by Engineer prior to paving. D. Ruts: If ruts or other objectionable irregularities form in subgrade during construction,reshape and re-roll subgrade before placing pavement.Fill ruts or other depressions with material similar to other subgrade material,and compact. 3.07 SUBGRADE TREATMENT A. Lime,Cement,Fly Ash,or Asphalt: 1. Incorporate the subgrade treatment material uniformly during subgrade preparation to the depth and rate specified in the contract documents. 2. Place subgrade treatment in the areas specified in the contract documents for the width of the pavement,plus 2 feet on each side. B. Geogrid or Geotextiles: 1. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations,on top of the prepared subgrade. 2. Place in the areas specified in the contract documents for the width of the pavement,plus 2 feet on each side. 2010-pg14 Standard Specifications Division 2—Earthwork Section 2010-Earthwork, Subgrade, and Subbase 3.08 SUBBASE A. Subgrade: Compact subgrade and shape smooth before subbase material is placed. B. Construction: Construct the specified type of subbase to the specified depth,plus 2 feet outside the pavement area. C. Moisture and Density: Compact subbase and provide testing according to Section 2010, 3.09. D. Final Elevation: 1. Trim to the design elevation and shape to the final template with an automatically-controlled trimming machine.Excess material may be salvaged and spread for use on any other approved project location or operation. 2. Conform to the design profile and cross-section to the extent that no point is higher than the designated elevation,and no point is lower than 0.05 foot below the design elevation. 3. Ensure that the top 1 inch of the subbase is uniformly moist prior to paving. 4. Do not allow hauling equipment and other traffic on completed subbase. 3.09 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Compaction Testing: If it is specified in the contract documents that the Contractor will conduct compaction testing,use the services of an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. B. Moisture Content and Density: 1. Ensure that moisture content falls within a range of optimum moisture to 4%above optimum moisture. 2. Compact cohesive soils to no less than 95%of maximum Standard Proctor Density;and cohesionless soils to no less than 70%of Relative Density. C. Testing: 1. Lab Test: Determine laboratory density of material according to ASTM D 698 or AASHTO T 99(Standard Proctor Density)or ASTM D 4253 and ASTM D 4254 (Maximum and Minimum Index Density for Cohesionless Soils).Provide at least one analysis for each material type used unless provided by the Engineer. 2. Field Test: a. Perform in-place field density and moisture testing according to ASTM D 2922 and ASTM D 3017(nuclear)or ASTM D 1556(sand cone)and ASTM D 2216(moisture content). b. Frequency: 1.) Urban Section: Provide one test per lift per 150 feet.If section is less than 300 feet,perform at least two tests per lift. 2) Rural Section: Provide one test for each 500 cubic yards of material placed,with at least two tests per lift. 3. Test only locations selected by the Engineer. 4. The Engineer may require additional testing if noncompliance or change in conditions occur. E. Test Failure: Rework,recompact,and retest as necessary until required compaction is achieved. END OF SECTION 2010- pg15 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Trench Excavation for Pipe Systems B. Trench Foundation Stabilization C. Pipe Bedding and Backfill 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Excavate trench for pipe installation. B. Stabilize trench and install pipe bedding materials. C. Place backfill material in trench. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. Gradation reports for bedding materials. B. Results of required testing. C. Dewatering plan. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS None. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. General: The following items are incidental to the underground utility being installed and will not be paid for separately: 1. Standard trench excavation. 2. Removal and disposal of unsuitable backfill material encountered during standard trench excavation. 3. Removal of abandoned private utilities encountered during trench excavation. 4. Furnishing and placing granular bedding material. 5. Placing and compacting backfill material. 6. Dewatering. 7. Sheeting,shoring,and bracing. 8. Adjusting the moisture content of excavated backfill material to the range specified for placement and compaction. 9. Temporary support for existing water,sewer,gas,telephone,electric,and other utilities or services that cross the trench. B. Rock Excavation: 3010-pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill 1.Measurement: Measurement will be by cubic yards of rock removed. 2.Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per cubic yard for the quantity of rock removed. C. Trench Foundation: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in tons for the quantity of stabilization material required to replace material removed by over-excavation.Measurement will be based on the scale tickets for the material delivered and incorporated into the project.Trench foundation required to correct unauthorized over-excavation will not be measured. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per ton for the quantity of stabilization material furnished and placed. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal and disposal of over-excavated material required to stabilize trench foundation;and furnishing,hauling,and placing stabilization material. D. Replacement of Unsuitable Backfill Material: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in cubic yards for the quantity of backfill material required to replace unsuitable backfill material removed during standard trench excavation.Measurement will be based on compacted material in place. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per cubic yard for the quantity of backfill material furnished. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing,hauling,and placing backfill material. E. Special Pipe Embedment or Encasement: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be by the linear foot along the centerline of pipe for each type of special embedment or encasement. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for each type of special pipe embedment or encasement. 3. Includes: Unit price includes but is not limited to,furnishing and placing all required special pope embedment or encasement materials. F. Trench Compaction Testing: If the contract documents specify that the Contractor is responsible for trench compaction testing,measurement and payment will be as follows. 1. Measurement: Lump sum item;no measurement will be made. 2. Payment:Payment will be at the lump sum price for trench compaction testing. 3. Includes: Lump sum price includes,but is not limited to,all payments associated with retesting resulting from failure of initial tests. 3010-pg 2 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS EXCAVATED FROM A TRENCH A. Standard Trench Excavation:All materials encountered during trench excavation,except rock and over- excavation. 1. Suitable Backfill Material: Class II,Class III,Class IVA,or Class IVB as defined in Section 3010, 2.02. 2. Unsuitable Backfill Material: Includes,but is not limited to,the following materials: a. Soils not classified as suitable backfill material,as defined in Section 3010,2.02. b. Individual stones or concrete chunks larger than 6 inches and averaging more than one per each cubic foot of soil. c. Frozen materials. d. Stumps,logs,branches,and brush. e. Trash,metal,or construction waste. f. Soil in clumps or clods larger than 6 inches,and without sufficient fine materials to fill voids during placement. g. Environmentally contaminated soils. h. Materials removed as rock excavation or over-excavation. 3. Topsoil: Class V material.Comply with Section 3010,2.03. B. Rock Excavation: Boulders or sedimentary deposits that cannot be removed in trenches without continuous use of pneumatic tools or blasting. C. Over-excavation: Excavation of unsuitable or unstable material in trenches below the pipe zone,comply with Figure 3010.101. 2.02 BEDDING MATERIAL A. Class I Material: 1. Crushed stone complying with the following gradation: Sieve Percent Passing 1 'h" 100 1" 95 to 100 25 to 60 No.4 0 to 10 No. 8 0 to 5 2. The Engineer may allow the use of gravel or authorize a change in gradation subject to materials available locally at the time of construction. 3. The Engineer may authorize the use of crushed PCC for pipe sizes up to 12 inches. 4. Use aggregates having a percentage of wear,Grading A or B,not exceeding 50%determined according to AASHTO T 96. 3010-pg 3 Standard Specifications Division 3 —Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill 2.03 BACKFILL MATERIAL A. Class II Material: Manufactured and non-manufactured open-graded(clean)or dense-graded(clean) processed aggregate,clean sand,or coarse-grained natural soils(clean)with little or no fines. Class II materials are further described in Table 3010.01. Table 3010.01: Class II Material Soil Group Percentage Passing Sieve Sizes Type Symbol ASTM Description 1 '/2 in. No.4 No.200 D 2487 Well-graded gravels and gravel- GW sand mixtures;little or no fines. "<50o Coarsef Poorly-graded gravels and gravel Coarse-Grained GP sand mixtures;little or no fines. Fraction" 100% <5% Soils,clean Well-graded sands and gravelly SW sands;little or no fines. > o"Coarse f SP Poorly-graded sands and gravelly Fraction" sands;little or no fines. Coarse-Grained e. GW-GC Sands and gravels which are o Soils,borderline g' borderline between clean and with 100% Varies 5 / to clean to with fines SP-SM fines. 12/o B. Class III Materials: 1. Natural coarse-grained soils with fines.Class III materials are further described in Table 3010.02. 2. Do not use where water condition in trench may cause instability. Table 3010.02: Class III Material Soil Group Type Symbol ASTM Description D 2487 GM Silty gravels,gravel-sand-silt mixtures Coarse-Grained Soils,with GC Clayey gravels,gravel-sand-clay mixtures fines SM Silty sands, sand-silt mixtures. SC Clayey sands,sand-clay mixtures. C. Class IVA Material: 1. Natural fine-grained inorganic soils.Class IVA materials are further described in Table 3010.03. 2. The Engineer will determine if material is not suitable for use as backfill material under deep fills, surface applied wheel loads,heavy vibratory compactors,tampers,or other conditions. 3. Do not use where water conditions in trench may cause instability. 4. Material is suitable for use in dry trench conditions only. 3010-pg 4 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill Table 3010.03: Class IVA Material Soil Group Type Symbol ASTM Description D 2487 Inorganic silts and very fine sands,rock flour, ML silty or clayey fine sands,silts with slight Fine-Grained plasticity. Soils(inorganic) Inorganic clays of low to medium plasticity, CL gravelly clays, sandy clays,silty clay,lean clay. D. Class IVB Material: 1. Natural fine-grained inorganic(high elastic silts and plastic clays—fat clay)with a liquid limit greater than 50%.Class IVA materials are further described in Table 3010.04. 2. When approved by the Engineer,material may be used as final trench backfill in a dry trench. 3. Do not use in the pipe embedment zone. Table 3010.04: Class IVB Material Soil Group Type Symbol ASTM Description D 2487 Fine-Grained Soils MH Inorganic silts,micaceous or diatomaceous fine sandy or silty soils,elastic silts. (inorganic) CH Inorganic clays of high plasticity,fat clays. 2.04 TOPSOIL A. Class V Material: 1. Organic soils.Class V materials are further described in Table 3010.05. 2. Use only as topsoil outside of the pavement,unless otherwise specified or allowed by the Engineer. 3. Do not use in the pipe embedment zone Table 3010.05: Class V Material Type Soil Group Description Symbol Organic silts and organic silty clays of low Organic Soils(Unsuitable for OL plasticity. backfill) OH Organic clays of medium to high plasticity., organic silts. Highly Organic(Unsuitable for PT Peat and other high organic soils. backfill) 2.05 STABILIZATION(FOUNDATION)MATERIALS 3010-pg 5 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill A. Clean 2 V2 inch crushed stone with the following gradation: Sieve Percent Passing 2 ''V2" 100 2" 90 to 100 1 '/2" 35to70 1" 0to20 ''V2" 0 to 5 B. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation depending on materials available locally at time of construct ions. C. Crushed concrete may be used,if approved by the Engineer, if it is within+5%of the gradation for each size of material. 2.06 SPECIAL PIPE EMBEDMENT AND ENCASEMENT MATERIAL A. Concrete Cradle,Arch,or Encasement: Use Iowa DOT Class C concrete. B. Flowable Mortar: Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2506.02. C. CLSM: 1. Approximate quantities per cubic yard: a. Cement: 50 pounds b. Fly ash: 250 pounds c. Fine aggregate: 2,910 pounds d. Water: 60 gallons 2. A compressive strength of at least 50 psi compressive strength at 28 calendar days can be expected. 3. Comply with material requirements of Iowa DOT Article 2506.02. 3010-pg 6 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Notify the Engineer prior to the start of excavation activities. B. Remove topsoil to a minimum depth of 12 inches and stockpile. C. Excavate trench to required elevations and dimensions.Comply with Figure 3010.101. 1. Protect existing facilities,trees,and shrubs during trench excavation. 2. Place excavated material away from trench. 3. Grade spoil piles to drain.Do not allow piles to obstruct drainage. D. Unsuitable Backfill Material: 1. If unsuitable backfill material is encountered,notify the Engineer. 2. Remove rock,rubbish,boulders,debris,and other unsuitable backfill materials at least 6 inches below and on each side of the pipe. 3. Keep unsuitable backfill material separated from suitable backfill material and topsoil. 4. Restore trench to design dimensions using bedding or stabilization material. 3.02 ROCK OR UNSTABLE SOILS IN TRENCH BOTOOM A. Notify the Engineer prior to over-excavation. B. The Engineer will determine the need for over-excavation and trench foundation stabilization prior to installation of pipes and structures. C. Comply with Figure 3010.101 for over-excavation of rock and wet or soft foundations. 3.03 TRENCH PROTECTION A. Install adequate trench protection(sheeting,shoring,and bracing)to prevent ground movement or damage to adjacent structures,pipelines,and utilities. B. Move trench boxes carefully to avoid disturbing pipe,bedding,or trench wall. 3.04 DEWATERING A. Maintain water levels below the bottom of trench excavation. B. Perform the dewatering operation according to the dewatering plan approved by the Engineer.The dewatering plan may be modified to meet actual field conditions,with approval of the Engineer. C. Ensure operation of the dewatering system does not damage adjoining structures and facilities.Cease dewatering operations and notify the Engineer if damage is observed. D. Discharged Water: 1. Do not discharge water into sanitary sewers. 2. Discharging water into storm sewers requires Engineer's approval. 3. Obtain permission of adjacent property owner prior to discharging water onto their property. 4. Maintain and control water discharge as necessary to prevent a safety hazard for vehicular and pedestrian traffic. 5. Direct water discharge away from electrical facilities or equipment. 6. Use dewatering equipment that will minimize disturbance from noise and fumes. 7. Protect discharge points from erosion.Provide sediment control for sediment contaminated water discharged directly from trench. 3010-pg 7 Standard Specifications Division 3 —Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill 3.05 PIPE BEDDING AND BACKFILL A. General: Comply with Figures 3010.101,3010.102,3010.103,3010.104 and3010.105,as appropriate. 1. Bedding and backfill used for pipe installation will depend on: a. Type of installation(water main,sanitary sewer gravity main,sanitary sewer force main,or storm sewer). b. Pipe Material. c. Depth of bury. d. Pipe diameter. 2. After pipe installation,place remaining bedding material and immediately place backfill in trench. 3. Adjust the moisture content of excessively wet,but otherwise suitable,backfill material by spreading, turning aerating,and otherwise working material as necessary to achieve required moisture range. 4. Adjust the moisture content of excessively dry,but otherwise suitable,backfill material by adding water,then turning,mixing,and otherwise blending the water uniformly throughout the material until the required moisture range is achieved. 5. Hydraulic compaction(flooding with water)is not allowed unless authorized by the Engineer. B. Pipe Bedding: 1. Granular Material: a. Class I granular bedding material is required for all gravity mains.Use when specified for pressure pipes. b. Comply with Figures 3010.101,3010.102,3010.103,3010.104 and 3010.105. c. Place bedding material in the bottom of the trench in lifts no greater than 6 inches thick. Consolidate and moderately compact bedding material. d. Shape bedding material to evenly support pipe at the proper line and grade,with full contact under the bottom of the pipe.Excavate for pipe bells. e. Install pipe and system components. f. Place,consolidate,and moderately compact additional bedding material adjacent to the pipe to a depth equal 1/6 the outside diameter of the pipe. 2. Suitable Backfill Material: a. Only use with pressure pipe.Comply with Figure 3010.104. b. Use suitable backfill material to shape trench bottom to evenly support pipe at the proper line and grade,with full contact under the bottom of the pipe.Excavate for pipe bells. 3. Special Pipe Embedment and Encasement Materials: a. Concrete,Flowable Mortar,or CLSM: 1) If specified in the contract documents,use concrete,flowable mortar,or CLSM in lieu of other bedding materials. 2) Secure pipe against displacement of flotation prior to placing concrete,flowable mortar,or CLSM. b. Waterstop: I) Place Class IVA clay backfill material,and compact to at least 90%of Standard Proctor Density. Obtain required compaction within a soil moisture range of optimum moisture to 4%above optimum moisture content. 2) If trench stabilization material is required,extend waterstop through stabilization material to bottom of trench. C. Haunch Support: Place from the top of the pipe bedding to the springline of the pipe. 1. Granular Material: a. Place Class I material in lifts no greater than 6 inches thick. b. Consolidate and moderately compact by slicing with a shovel or using other approved techniques. 3010-pg 8 Standard Specifications Division 3 —Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill 2. Suitable Backfill Material: a. Place in lifts no greater than 6 inches thick. b. For Class II backfill material,compact to at least 65%relative density. c. For Class III and Class IVA backfill materials,compact to at least 90%of Standard Proctor Density.Obtain required compaction within a soil moisture range of optimum moisture to 4% above optimum moisture content. 3. Special Pipe Embedment and Encasement Materials: a. Concrete,Flowable Mortar,or CLSM: 1) If specified in the contract documents,use concrete,flowable mortar,or CLSM in lieu of other bedding materials. 2) Secure pipe against displacement of floatation prior to placing concrete,flowable mortar,or CLSM. b. Waterstop: Place and compact Class IVA clay backfill material according to the suitable backfill material requirement above. D. Primary and Secondary Backfill: 1. General: a. For primary backfill,place from the springline of the pipe to the top of the pipe. b. For secondary backfill,place from the top of the pipe to 1 foot above the top of the pipe. 2. Granular Material: a. Place in lifts no greater than 6 inches thick. b. Compact to at least 65%relative density. 3. Suitable Backfill Material: a. Place in lifts no greater than 6 inches thick. b. For Class II backfill material,compact to at least 65%relative density. c. For Class III and Class IVA backfill materials,compact to at least 95%of Standard Proctor Density.Obtain required compaction within a soil moisture range of optimum moisture to 4% above optimum moisture content. 4. Special Pipe Embedment and Encasement Materials: a. Concrete,Flowable Mortar,or CLSM: 1) If specified in the contract documents,use concrete,flowable mortar,or CLSM in lieu of other bedding materials. 2) Secure pipe against displacement or flotation prior to placing concrete,flowable mortar,or CLSM. b. Waterstop: Place and compact Class IVA clay backfill material according to the suitable backfill material requirement above. E. Final Trench Backfill: 1. Place suitable backfill material from 1 foot above the top of the pipe to the top of the trench. a. Use no more than 8 inch thick lifts for backfill areas more than 3 feet below the bottom of pavement. b. Use no more than 6 inch thick lifts for backfill areas less than or equal to 3 feet below the bottom of pavement. 2. Place backfill material after recording locations of connections and appurtenances or at the Engineer's direction. 3. Class I and Class II Backfill Material: a. Compact to at least 65%relative density within right-of-way. b. Compact to at least 50%relative density outside right-of-way. 4. Class III and Class IVA Backfill Material: a. Compact to at least 95%of Standard Proctor Density within right-of-way. b. Compact to at least 90%of Standard Proctor Density outside right-of-way. 3010-pg 9 Standard Specifications Division 3—Trench and Trenchless Construction Section 3010—Trench Excavation and Backfill c. Obtain required compaction within a soil moisture range of optimum moisture to 4%above optimum moisture content. 5. In areas to remain unpaved,terminate backfill material 8 inches below finished grade.Use topsoil for the final 8 inches above trench backfill material. 6. Terminate backfill material at subgrade elevation in areas to be paved. 3.06 TRENCH COMPACTION TESTING A. General: When trench compaction testing is specified in the contract documents as the Contractor's responsibility,provide testing of trench backfill material using the services of an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer. B. Soil Testing: 1. Cohesive Soils: a. ]Determine moisture-density relationships by ASTM D 698(Standard Proctor).Perform at least one test for each type of cohesive soil used. b. ]Determine in-place density and moisture content.Use ASTM D 1556(sand-cone method)and ASTM D 2216(laboratory moisture content),or use ASTM D 6938(nuclear methods for density and moisture content). 2. Cohesionless Soils: a. Determine maximum and minimum index density and calculate relative density using ASTM D 4253 and ASTM D 4254. b. For Class I granular bedding material,determine gradation according to ASTM C 136. C. Field Testing: 1. Testiing Frequency and Locations: Perform testing of the final trench backfill,beginning at a depth of 2 feet above the top of the pipe,as follows: a. Coordinate the timing of testing with the Engineer. b. The Engineer will determine the location of testing. c. For each 2 vertical feet of consolidated fill,provide tests at a maximum horizontal spacing of 200 feet and at all street crossings. d. Additional testing may be required by the Engineer in the event of non-compliance or if conditions change. e. if necessary,excavate to the depth and size as required by the Engineer to allow compaction tests.Place backfill material and recompact. 2. Test Failure and Retesting: Rework,recompact,and retest as necessary until specified compaction and moisture content is achieved in all areas of the trench. In the event of failed tests,the Engineer may;require retesting as deemed necessary. END OF SECTION 3010-pg 10 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer STORM SEWERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Storm Sewers B. Abandonment of Storm Sewers 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Construct storm sewers. B. Abandon storm sewers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS None. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Storm Sewer: 1. Trenched: a. Measurement:Each type and size of pipe installed in a trench will be measured in linear feet along the centerline of the pipe from center of intake or manhole to center of intake or manhole.Where the end of the pipe discharges to a ditch or waterway, measurement will be to the end of the pipe,exclusive of aprons.Lengths of elbows and tees will be included in the length of pipe measured. b. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,trench excavation,dewatering, furnishing bedding material,placing bedding and backfill material,joint wrapping, wyes and other fittings,pipe joints,pipe connections,testing,and inspection. 2. Trenchless: a. Measurement:Each type and size of pipe installed by trenchless methods will be measured in linear feet along the centerline of the pipe. b. Payment:Payment will be made at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing and installing pipe; trenchless installation materials and equipment;pit excavation,dewatering,and placing backfill material;pipe connections;testing;and inspection. B. Storm Sewer with Casing Pipe: 1. Trenched: a. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe installed with a casing pipe in a trench will be measured in linear feet along the centerline of the casing pipe from end of casing to end of casing. 4020—pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer b. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to, furnishing and installing both carrier pipe and casing pipe,trench excavation,dewatering,furnishing bedding material,placing bedding and backfill material,furnishing and installing annular space fill material,casing spacers,pipe connections,testing,and inspection. 2. Trenchless: a. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe installed by trenchless methods with a casing pipe will be measured in linear feet along the centerline of the casing pipe from end of casing to end of casing. b. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of carrier pipe. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing and installing both carrier pipe and casing pipe;trenchless installation materials and equipment;pit excavation,dewatering,and placing backfill material;casing spacers; furnishing and installing annular space fill material;pipe connections;testing;and inspection. C. Removal of Storm Sewer: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe removed will be measured in linear feet from end to end. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of pipe removed. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal, disposal,and capping(if specified)of pipe. D. Connection to Existing Manhole or Intake: Connections to existing manhole or intake will be measured and paid according to Section 6010, 1.08. E. Storm Sewer Abandonment: 1. Plug: Plugging storm sewers is incidental to other work and will not be paid for separately. 2. Fill and Plug: a. Measurement: Each size of pipe filled and plugged will be measured in linear feet from end of pipe to end of pipe. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for each size of pipe filled and plugged. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STORM SEWERS A. Reinforced Concrete Pipe(RCP): 1. Comply with ASTM C 76. 2. Minimum Class III,Wall B(Iowa DOT Class 2000D). 3. Use tongue and groove joints with cold applied bituminous or rubber rope gasket jointing materials,unless otherwise specified.If specified,use rubber 0-ring or profile gasket complying with ASTM C 443. 4. If specified,wrap exterior of each joint with engineering fabric. B. Reinforced Concrete Arch Pipe(RCAP): 1. Comply with ASTM C 506. 2. Minimum Class A-III(Iowa DOT Class 2000D). 4020—pg 2 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer 3. Use tongue and groove joints with cold applied bituminous or rubber rope gasket jointing materials,unless otherwise specified. 4. If specified,wrap exterior of each joint with engineering fabric. C. Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Pipe(RCEP): 1. Comply with ASTM C 507. 2. Minimum Class HE III(Iowa DOT Class 2000D)or Class VE III(Iowa DOT Class 2000D). 3. Use tongue and groove joints with cold applied bituminous or rubber rope gasket jointing materials,unless otherwise specified. 4. If specified,wrap exterior of each joint with engineering fabric. D. Reinforced Concrete Low Head Pressure Pipe(RCPP): 1. Comply with ASTM C 361;minimum Class C 25. 2. Use tongue and groove joints.Comply with ASTM C 361 for rubber 0-rings or profile gaskets. E. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe(PVC): 1. Use pipe complying with the following: a. Types of PVC pipes: 1) Corrugated exterior,smooth interior,ASTM F 949. 2) Solid wall,ASTM D 3034 or ASTM F 679. 3) Closed profile,ASTM F 1803. 4) Composite,ASTM D 2680. b. PVC plastic meeting ASTM D 1784,Cell Classification 12454. c. Minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi. d. Integral bell and spigot joints with elastomeric seals according to ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. 2. Do not use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the PVC pipe will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. F. High Density Polyethylene Pipe(HDPE): 1. Use pipe complying with the following: a. AASHTO M 294,Type S corrugated exterior and smooth interior. b. ASTM D 3350 minimum resin Cell Classification 335420 C. c. Minimum pipe stiffness at 5%deflection according to ASTM D 2412. d. Integral bell and spigot joints with elastomeric seals complying with ASTM F 477. e. Maximum 5%deflection of the average inside diameter by testing after installation according to Section 4060,3.05. 2. Do not use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the HDPE pipe will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. G. Corrugated Metal Pipe(CMP): 1. Use pipe complying with the following: a. AASHTO M 36,Type I. b. Zinc coating complying with AASHTO M 218. c. Corrugated steel circular section with annular or helical corrugations. d. Gage of pipe according to Iowa DOT Standard Road Plan DR-104 or as specified in the contract documents. e. Coupling bands with annular or helical corrugations to match pipe ends. 4020—pg 3 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer 2. Do not use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the CMP will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. H. Spiral Rib Pipe: 1. Use pipe complying with the following: a. ASTM A 760 Type 1R. b. Corrugation profile of 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch by 7 1/2 inches. c. Type 2 aluminized steel complying with ASTM A 929. d. Minimum thickness of 0.064 inch.Use gage of pipe according to manufacturer's requirements or as specified in the contract documents. e. Coupling bands complying with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Do riot use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the spiral rib pipe will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. I. Coated Corrugated Metal Pipe: 1. Use in corrosive soil or effluent conditions,or where specified in the contract documents or required by the Engineer. 2. Comply with AASHTO M 274. Use gage of pipe according to Iowa DOT Standard Road Plans DR-104 or as specified in the contract documents. 3. Do not use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the coated CMP will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. J. Corrugated Metal Arch Pipe(CMAP): 1. Use pipe complying with the following: a. AASHTO M 36,Type II. b. Zinc coating complying with AASHTO M 218. c. Corrugated steel Type I pipe reformed into a pipe-arch having an approximately flat bottom. d. Coupling bands with annular corrugations or helical corrugations to match pipe ends. e. Gage of pipe according to Iowa DOT Standard Road Plan DR-104. 2. Do not use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the CMAP will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. K. Spiral Rib Arch Pipe: 1. Use pipe complying with the following: a. ASTM A 760 Type IIR. b. Corrugation profile of 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch by 7 1/2 inch. c. Type 2 aluminized steel complying with ASTM A 929. d. Minimum thickness of 0.064 inch.Use gage of pipe complying with manufacturer's requirements or as specified in the contract documents. e. Coupling bands complying with the manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Do not use in the right-of-way.Use only outside the right-of-way in public utility easement areas where no utilities exist or are proposed(running parallel or crossing)or where the trench for the spiral rib arch pipe will not be disturbed,and where the Engineer allows. L. Jointing Material for Concrete Pipe: 4020—pg 4 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer 1. Bituminous Jointing Material:Use a cold-applied mastic sewer joint sealing compound recommended by the manufacturer for the intended use and approved by the Engineer. Comply with ASTM C 990. 2. Rubber Rope Gasket Jointing Material: Comply with ASTM C 990. 3. Rubber 0-ring or Profile Gasket: Comply with ASTM C 443 (for RCP)or ASTM C 361 (for RCPP). M. Bituminous Joint Primer: Material intended for use in priming concrete joints. Comply with the requirements of ASTM D 41. N. Engineering Fabric: Comply with Iowa DOT Article 4196.01. O. Non-Shrink Grout: Comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.491.13. 2.02 CASING PIPE Comply with Section 3020,2.02 for casing pipe requirements. 4020—pg5 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify measurements at site;make necessary field measurements to accurately determine pipe makeup lengths or closures. B. Examine site conditions to ensure construction operations do not pose hazards to adjacent structures or facilities. 3.02 PIPE INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Clean pipe interior and joints prior to lowering into trench. Keep pipe clean during construction. 2. Begin at the lowest point in the line.Lay groove or bell end pointing upstream unless Otherwise specified. 3. Place pipe with lifting holes at the top of the pipe and fill lift hole with non-shrink grout or manufactured plugs. 4. Assemble joints as specified by the pipe manufacturer.When specified,wrap exterior of storm sewer pipe joints with engineering fabric. 5. Use a saw to cut ends of pipe flush with inside wall of manholes,intakes,and structures. Do not use hammer or other means to break pipe. 6. Provide manholes and intakes as specified in the contract documents. 7. Use watertight stopper,plug,or other approved means to protect the exposed upstream ends of the pipe and prevent soil sediment from entering the storm sewer system. B. Trenched: 1. Excavate trench and provide pipe bedding and backfill material as specified in Section 3010. 2. Prepare trench bottom to design line and grade so that only minor movement of the pipe is necessary after installation. 3. Lay pipe to design line and grade. Set field grades to invert of pipe. 4. Provide uniform bearing for full pipe barrel length.Excavate bell holes as necessary for uniform support of pipe barrel on bedding material. 5. Do not lay pipe in water or on saturated soil or bedding,or allow water to rise in trench around pipe prior to placing backfill material. 6. Do not disturb installed pipe and bedding when using movable trench boxes and shields. Block or anchor pipe as necessary to prevent joint displacement. C. Trenchless: Comply with Section 3020. 3.03 STORM SEWER INSTALLED WITHIN A CASING PIPE Comply with Section 3020,3.04 for installation of storm sewer within casing pipe. 3.04 PIPE JOINTING A. General: 1. Clean joint surfaces to remove soil or foreign material prior to jointing pipe. 2. Assemble joints according to pipe manufacturer's recommendations.Use equipment that does not apply damaging forces to pipe joints. 4020—pg 6 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer B. Reinforced Concrete Pipe(RCP),Reinforced Concrete Arch Pipe(RCAP),and Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Pipe(RCEP): 1. Use cold applied bituminous or rubber rope gasket jointing materials unless otherwise specified. a. Apply joint material to entire tongue,or to top half of tongue and bottom half of groove,in sufficient quantity to fill the joint.Close the joint between pipes. b. Fill remaining voids in the joint,both inside and outside of pipe,with joint material. Smooth the joint material on the inside of pipes 24 inches and larger. 2. If a rubber 0-ring or profile gasket is specified for RCP,coat the rubber gasket and joint with soap-based lubricant immediately prior to closing the joint. 3. If wrapped pipe joint is specified,comply with Figure 4020.211. Secure engineering fabric in place to prevent displacement while placing backfill material. 4. Place pipe such that joint openings on the outside or inside of the pipe do not exceed 1/8 inch at the bottom and 5/8 inch at the top. C. Reinforced Concrete Low Head Pressure Pipe(RCPP);Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe(PVC) and Corrugated PVC Pipe; and High Density Polyethylene Pipe(HDPE): Coat gasket and joint with soap-based lubricant immediately prior to closing the joint. D. Corrugated Metal Pipe(CMP)and Corrugated Metal Arch Pipe(CMAP): Lap coupling bands to form a tightly closed joint upon installation. E. Connections between Dissimilar Pipes: 1. Use manufactured adapters or couplings approved by the Engineer. 2. Where adapters or couplings are not available,the Engineer may authorize use of a concrete collar as shown in Figure 4020.211. 3.05 TOLERANCES The following tolerances apply to utilities installed by open trench construction.For trenchless construction,comply with Section 3020. A. Do not allow horizontal and vertical alignment to vary from design line and grade at any structure by more than 1%of the inside diameter of the pipe or 1/4 inch,whichever is larger. B. Do not allow the horizontal alignment of the pipe to vary from design line at any point along the pipe by more than 1%of the inside diameter of the pipe. C. Low spots holding water exceeding the following depths for each pipe size will be considered unaccepted and must be removed and reinstalled to proper grade. Pipe Diameter Maximum Low Spot Depth 8" 1/2" 10" 1/2" 12" 3/4" 15" 3/4" 18"and Larger 5%of Pipe Diameter' *Measured to the nearest 1/2" 3.06 CONFLICTS A. Horizontal Separation of Gravity Sewers from Water Mains: 1. Separate gravity storm sewer mains from water mains by a horizontal distance of at least 10 feet unless: 4020—pg 7 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4020—Storm Sewer • The top of a sewer main is at least 18 inches below the bottom of the water main, and • The sewer is placed in a separate trench or in the same trench on a bench of undisturbed earth at a minimum horizontal separation of 3 feet from the water main. 2. When it is impossible to obtain the required horizontal clearance of 3 feet and a vertical clearance of 18 inches between sewers and water mains,the sewers must be constructed of water main materials meeting the requirements of Section 5010,2.01.However,provide a linear separation of at least 2 feet. B. Separation of Sewer Force Mains from Water Mains: Separate storm sewer force mains and water mains by a horizontal distance of at least 10 feet unless: 1. The force main is constructed of water main materials meeting a minimum pressure rating of 150 psi and the requirements of Section 5010,2.01 and 2. The sewer force main is laid at least 4 linear feet from the water main. C. Separation of Sewer and Water Main Crossovers: 1. Vertical separation of storm sewers crossing under any water main should be at least 18 inches when measured from the top of the sewer to the bottom of the water main. If physical conditions prohibit the separation,the sewer may be placed not closer than 6 inches below a water main or 18 inches above a water main.Maintain the maximum feasible separation distance in all cases.The sewer and water pipes must be adequately supported and have watertight joints.Use a low permeability soil for backfill material within 10 feet of the point of crossing. 2. Where the storm sewer crosses over of less than 18 inches below a water main, locate one full length of sewer pipe of water main material or reinforced concrete pipe(RCP)with flexible 0-ring gasket joints so both joints are as far as possible from the water main. 3.07 STORM SEWER ABANDONMENT A. Plug: 1. Prior to placing the sewer plug,the Engineer will verify the sewer line is not in use. 2. Construct sewer plug by completely filling the end of the pipe with concrete.Force concrete into the end of the pipe for a distance of 16 inches,or one-half the pipe diameter,whichever is greater. B. Fill: 1. Prior to filling the sewer,the Engineer will verify the sewer line is not in use. 2. If specified in the contract documents,fill the line to be abandoned with flowable mortar or CLSM (comply with Section 3010)by gravity flow or pumping. 3.08 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE OR INTAKE Comply with Section 6010,3.05. 3.09 CLEANING,INSPECTION,AND TESTING Clean,inspect,and test according to Section 4060. END OF SECTION 4020—pg 8 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4040—Subdrains and Footing Drain Collectors SUBDRAINS AND FOOTING DRAIN COLLECTORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Subdrains B. Subdrain Cleanouts and Outlets C. Footing Drain Collectors D. Storm Sewer Service and Connections 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Construct subdrains,subdrain cleanouts and oulets,and footing drain collectors. B. Construct storm sewer service and connections. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1—General Provisions and Covenants. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS None. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Subdrains: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe installed will be measured in linear feet from end of pipe to end of pipe along the centerline of pipe,exclusive of outlets.Lengths of elbows and tees will be included in length of pipe measured. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price of each type and size of pipe. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,trench excavation,furnishing and placing bedding and backfill material,engineering fabric,(when specified),connectors,and elbows and tees. B. Footing Drain Collectors: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe will be measured in linear feet along centerline of pipe from end of pipe. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price for each type and size of pipe. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,trench excavation,pipe,wyes,tap,fittings,and furnishing and placing bedding and backfill material. C. Subdrain of Footing Drain Cleanouts: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of subdrain or footing drain cleanout will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment for each cleanout will be made at the unit price for each type and size of subdrain of footing drain cleanout. D. Subdrain of Footing Drain Outlets and Connections: 4040—pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4040—Subdrains and Footing Drain Collectors 1. Measurement: Each type and size of outlet or connection to a structure will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment for each outlet or connection to a structure will be made at the unit price for each type and size installed. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,pipe,non-shrink grout,coupling bands,and rodent guards for pipes 6 inches or smaller. E. Storm Sewer Service Stub: The storm sewer service stub is the portion of the storm sewer service from the footing drain collector or storm sewer to a point 10 feet outside of the right-of-way or as specified in the contract documents. 1. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe will be matured in linear feet along centerline of pipe from the centerline of storm sewer or footing drain collector to 10 feet outside of the right-of-way. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per linear foot for each type and size of storm sewer service stub. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,trench excavation,furnishing bedding material, placing bedding and backfill material,tap,fittings,and plugs. 4040—pg 2 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4040—Subdrains and Footing Drain Collectors PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FOOTING DRAIN COLLECTORS A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings(Solid Wall PVC): 1. Comply with ASTM D 3034,minimum thickness SDR 35,46 psi minimum pipe stiffness. 2. Use PVC plastic conforming to ASTM D 1784,Cell Classification 12454. 3. Integral bell and spigot type rubber gasket joint complying with ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. B. Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings(Corrugated PVC): 1. Use corrugated exterior, smooth interior,PVC. 2. Comply with ASTM F 949,minimum pipe stiffness,46 psi. 3. Use PVC plastic complying with ASTM D 1784,Cell Classification 12454. 4. Integral bell and spigot type rubber gasket joint complying with ASTM D 3212 and ASTM F 477. C. High Density Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings(HDPE): 1. AASHTO M 252 or M 294,Type S corrugated exterior and smooth interior. 2. Integral bell and spigot joints with 0-ring rubber gasket meeting ASTM F 477. D. Reinforced Concrete Pipe(RCP): Comply with 4020,2.01. 2.02 TYPE 1 SUBDRAINS(LONGITUDINAL SUBDRAIN) A. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings(Solid Wall PVC): 1. Comply with Section 4040,2.01. 2. Slot subdrain pipe according to ASTM F 949 or perforate with four rows of 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch diameter holes along the bottom of the pipe. B. Corrugated Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings(Corrugated PVC): 1. Comply with Section 4040,2.01. 2. Slot subdrain pipe according to ASTM F 949. C. Corrugated Polyethylene Tubing and Fittings(Corrugated PE): 1. Comply with AASHTO M 252,Type C,corrugated interior and exterior or Type S,corrugated exterior and smooth interior. 2. Use only fittings supplied or recommended by pipe manufacturer for soil tight service. 3. Slot or perforate according to AASHTO M 252,Type CP or Type SP. 2.03 TYPE 2 SUBDRAINS(COMBINATION SUBDRAIN/FOOTING DRAIN COLLECTOR) A. Use materials complying with Section 4040,2.01. B. Perforate all pipe per the following requirements: 1. Solid Wall PVC Pipe: Comply with ASTM F 949 or perforate with four rows of 1/4 inch to 3/8 inch diameter holes along the bottom of the pipe. 2. Corrugated PVC Pipe: Comply with ASTM F 949. 3. HDPE Pipe: Comply with AASHTO M 252 or M 294,Type CP or Type SP. 2.04 POROUS BACKFILL MATERIAL 4040—pg 3 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4040—Subdrains and Footing Drain Collectors A. Crushed Stone or Processed Gravel: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4109.02,Gradation No.29 in the Aggregate Gradation Table and the quality requirements of Iowa DOT Section 4131. B. Pea Gravel: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4109.02,Gradation No.20 or No.21 in the Aggregate Gradation Table and the quality requirements of Iowa DOT Section 4131. 2.05 SUBDRAIN OUTLETS A. Corrugated Metal Pipe(CMP): 1. Comply with AASHTO M 36,Type 1. 2. Zinc coating complying with AASHTO M 218. 3. Use a corrugated steel circular section with annular or helical corrugation. 4. Minimum thickness of 0.052 inch. B. Corrugated HDPE: 1. Comply with Section 4040,2.01. 2. Pipe to be double-walled. C. PVC: Comply with Section 4040,2.01. D. Coupling Bands: Match annular or helical corrugations on coupling bands to pipe ends. E. Rodent Guard: Comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.443.01. 2.06 SUBDRAIN OR FOOTING DRAIN CLEANOUTS A. Type A-1 or A-2 Cleanouts: 1. Use 8 inch riser pipe of the same material as the adjacent subdrain or footing drain pipe.Comply with Figure 4040.232. 2. When a PVC cap is used on top of the cleanout,drive a 1 foot length of reinforcing steel into the ground immediately adjacent to the cleanout to allow future location. B. Type B Cleanouts: Comply with Figure 4040.232. 1. Use 24 inch diameter Class III RCP riser for subdrain 8 inches or smaller.Use 30 inch diameter Class III RCP riser for 10 inch and 12 inch subdrains. 2. Use RCP complying with Section 4020,2.01. 3. Manufactured cleanouts may be used with the approval of the Engineer. C. Castings: Use a heavy duty cast iron casting complying with Section 6010,2.10. 2.07 ENGINEERING FABRIC Use fabric complying with Iowa DOT Article 4196.01. 2.08 STORM SEWER SERVICE STUBS Use materials complying with Section 4040,2.01. 4040—pg 4 Standard Specifications Division 4—Sewers and Drains Section 4040—Subdrains and Footing Drain Collectors PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 SUBDRAINS A. Install Type 1 or Type 2 subdrain where specified in the contract documents.Comply with Figure 4040.231. 1. Excavate trench and provide pipe bedding and backfill as shown on the figures.Install engineering fabric if specified in the contract documents. 2. Begin subdrain installation at the outlet and continue upgrade. 3. Lay subdrain pipe to the proper line and grade.Place pipe with the perforations down. 4. If concrete pipe is specified for Type 2 subdrains,wrap exterior of each joint with engineering fabric and do not use joint sealant. 5. Place porous backfill material over installed pipe in layers not more than 6 inches thick.Thoroughly tamp each layer with mechanical tampers. 6. Restore pavement subbase material,shoulder material,or ground above subdrain trench as applicable. B. Provide cleanouts where specified in the contract documents.Comply with Figure 4040.232. C. Provide outlets where specified in the contract documents. 1. Comply with Figure 4040.233 for outlets to structures. 2. Install a rodent guard on all subdrain outlet pipes 6 inches and smaller. 3.02 FOOTING DRAIN COLLECTORS A. Install footing drain collectors according to Section 3010. B. If specified,install engineering fabric. C. Provide cleanouts and connections where specified in the contract documents. 1. Connect footing drain sewer collectors to storm sewer manhole or intake. 2. Provide fabricated or preformed wye or tee service fitting for each platted lot or building. D. Provide manholes,where specified,according to Section 6010. 3.03 FOOTING DRAIN SERVICE STUBS A. Provide footing drain service stubs at locations specified in the contract documents. B. Install wye or tee for each service connection. 1. For new storm sewer and footing drain collector construction,except RCP sewers,install wye or tee fittings according to the manufacturer's requirements. 2. For existing storm sewers,existing footing drain collectors,and all RCP sewers, saw or drill a neat hole in main and install preformed saddle wyes or tees according to the manufacturer's requirements. C. Install footing drain service stub to a location 10 feet beyond the right-of-way line or as specified in the contract documents. 1. For undeveloped properties,place a watertight stopper or plug in the end of the storm sewer service. 2. For reconnection of existing service pipe to new sewer pipe,use a manufactured flexible connection. END OF SECTION 4040—pg 5 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers STRUCTURES FOR SANITARY AND STORM SEWERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manholes and Intakes for Storm Sewers B. Manholes for Sanitary Sewers C. Adjustment of Existing Manholes and Intakes D. Connection to Existing Manholes and Intakes E. Removal of Manholes and Intakes F. Special Structures for Storm Sewers G. Excavation and Backfill of Structures 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Construct sanitary and storm sewer manholes to provide access to sewer systems for maintenance and cleaning purposes. B. Construct storm sewer intakes for collection of surface water and conveyance to the storm sewer system. C. Modify existing manholes and intakes as necessitated by other improvements adjacent to the manholes of intakes. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. Shop drawings of steel reinforcement,showing sizes,lengths,bends,and counts,if required. B. Concrete mix design,if required by Engineer. C. Shop drawing schedule of new manholes and/or intakes showing total depth,relative elevations of all connecting sanitary or storm sewer lines,all drops,and orientation of connecting lines. D. Results of required testing. E. Catalog cuts of iron castings and sewer line connection gaskets. F. Gradation and soil classification reports for structure bedding and backfill materials. G. Dewatering plan. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. Store reinforcing steel only on pallets or lagging. B. Follow the aggregate storage and concrete transport requirements in Iowa DOT Article 2301.02,C. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1—General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place concrete when stormy or inclement weather will prevent good quality work. B. Cold weather placement is restricted per Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,F. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 6010—pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers A. Manhole: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of manhole will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each type and size of manhole. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,excavation,furnishing bedding material,placing bedding and backfill material, compaction,base,structural concrete,reinforcing steel,precast units(if used), inverts,pipe connections,infiltration barriers(sanitary sewer manholes only),castings,and adjustment rings. B. Intake: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of intake will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each type and size of intake. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,excavation,furnishing bedding material,placing bedding and backfill material,compaction,base,structural concrete,reinforcing steel,precast units(if used), inverts,pipe connections,castings,and adjustment rings. C. Drop Connection: 1. Measurement: Each drop connection will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each drop connection. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,the connection to the manhole and all pipe, fittings,concrete encasement,and bedding and backfill material. D. Casting Extension Rings: 1. Measurement: Each casting extension ring will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each casting extension ring. E. Manhole or Intake Adjustment,Minor: 1. Measurement: Each existing manhole or intake adjusted to finished grade by addition or removal of adjustment rings or adjustment of adjustable casting will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price for each minor manhole or intake adjustment. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removing existing casting and existing adjustment rings, furnishing and installing adjustment rings,furnishing and installing new casting, and installing new infiltration barrier(sanitary sewer manholes only). F. Manhole or Intake Adjustment,Major: 1. Measurement: Each existing manhole or intake adjusted to grade by addition or removal of riser, cone or flat top sections,or the exchange of existing riser sections with sections having different vertical dimensions will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each major adjustment. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal of existing casting,adjustment rings,top sections,and risers;excavation;concrete and reinforcing steel or precast sections;furnishing and installing new casting;installing new infiltration barrier(sanitary sewer manholes only);placing backfill material;and compaction. G. Connection to Existing Manhole or Intake: 1. Measurement: Each connection made to an existing manhole or intake will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price for each sewer connection. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,coring or cutting into the existing manhole or intake,pipe connections,grout,and waterstop(when required). 6010—pg2 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers H. Remove Manhole or Intake: 1. Measurement: Each manhole or intake removed will be counted. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price for each manhole or intake. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,removal of casting,concrete,and reinforcement; plugging pipes;filling remaining structure with flowable mortar;and placing compacted fill over structure to finished grade. 6010—pg3 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANHOLE AND INTAKE TYPES Table 6010.01: Manhole and Intake Types Figure Type Previous Description No. Type 6010.301 SW-301 A Circular Sanitary Sewer Manhole 0 6010.302 SW-302 E Rectangular Sanitary Sewer Manhole 3 6010.303 SW-303 I Sanitary Sewer Manhole Over Existing Sewer `" 6010.304 SW-304 F Rectangular Base/Circular Top Sanitary Sewer Manhole 6010.305 SW-305 J Tee-section Sanitary Sewer Manhole 6010.401 SW-401 M-A Circular Storm Sewer Manhole E c 6010.402 SW-402 M-B Rectangular Storm Sewer Manhole 6010.403 SW-403 M-C Deep Will Rectangular Storm Sewer Manhole 6010.404 SW-404 M-D Rectangular Base/Circular Top Storm Sewer Manhole 6010.405 SW-405 M-E Tee-section Storm Sewer Manhole 6010.501 SW-501 M-A Single Grate Intake 6010.502 SW_502 M-B Circular Single Grate Intake 6010.503 SW-503 M-C Single Grate Intake with Manholes 6010.504 SW-504 M-C(special) Single Grate Intake with Flush-top Manhole 6010.505 SW-505 M-D Double Grate Intake 6010.506 SW-506 M-E Double Grate Intake with Manhole 6010.507 SW-507 M-F Single Open-throat Intake, Small Box y 6010.508 SW-508 M-F Single Open-throat Intake,Large Box (modified) 6010.509 SW-509 M-I Double Open-throat Intake, Small Box 6010.510 SW-510 M-I Double Open-throat Intake,Large Box (modified) 6010.511 SW-511 M-H Rectangular Area Intake 6010.512 SW-512 RCP Area Circular Area Intake 6010.513 SW-513 M-G Open-sided Area Intake 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Precast: Comply with ASTM C 478. B. Cast-in-place:Use Class C concrete.Comply with the following Iowa DOT Specifications and Materials I.M.s. 1. Iowa DOT Specifications Sections: a. 2403—Structural Concrete b. 4101—Portland Cement c. 4102—Water for Concrete and Mortar d. 4103—Liquid Admixtures for Portland Cement Concrete e. 4104—Burlap for Curing Concrete f. 4106—Plastic Film and Insulating Covers for Curing Concrete g. 4108—Supplementary Cementitious Materials h. 4109—Aggregate Gradations i. 4110—Fine Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete j. 4115—Coarse Aggregate for Portland Cement Concrete 2. Iowa DOT Materials I.M.s: a. 316—Flexural Strength of Concrete b. 318—Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by Pressure 6010—pg4 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers c. 403—Chemical Admixtures for Concrete d. 528—Structural Concrete Plant Inspection e. 529—Portland Cement Concrete Proportions f. 534—Mobile Mixture Inspection 2.03 REINFORCEMENT Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4151 for epoxy coated reinforcement. 2.04 NON-SHRINK GROUT Comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.491.13. 2.05 PRECAST RISER JOINTS A. Joint Ends: 1. Use tongue and groove ends. 2. If cast-in-place base is used,provide bottom riser with square bottom edge. B. Joint Sealant: 1. Sanitary Sewers: a. Rubber 0-ring or Profile Gasket: Flexible joint,complying with ASTM C 443. b. Bituminous Jointing Material: Use a cold-applied mastic sewer joint sealing compound recommended by the manufacturer for the intended use and approved by the Engineer. Comply with ASTM C 990. c. Butyl Sealant Wrap: Comply with ASTM C 877. 2. Storm Sewers: All joint sealants used on sanitary sewers may also be used for storm sewers. The following may also be used. a. Rubber Rope Gasket Jointing Material: Comply with ASTM C 990. b. Engineering Fabric Wrap: If specified in the contract documents,supply engineering fabric wrap complying with Iowa DOT Article 4196.01,B. 2.06 MANHOLE OR INTAKE TOP A. Capable of supporting HS-20 loading. B. Use eccentric cone on sanitary sewer manholes unless otherwise specified or allowed. 2.07 BASE A. Sanitary Sewer Manhole: 1. Circular Manhole: Integral base and lower riser section according to ASTM C 478. 2. All Other Manholes: Use precast or cast-in-place concrete base. B. Storm Sewer Manhole: Use precast or cast-in-place concrete base. C. Intake:Use precast or cast-in-place concrete base. 2.08 PIPE CONNECTIONS A. Flexible,Watertight Gasket: Comply with ASTM C 923. B. Non-Shrink Grout: Comply with Section 6010,2.04. C. Waterstop: Provide elastomeric gasket that surrounds pipe and attaches with stainless steel bands and is designed to stop the movement of water along the interface between a pipe and a surrounding concrete collar. D. Concrete Collar: Comply with Section 6010,2.02 and 2.03. 2.09 MANHOLE OR INTAKE ADJUSTMENT RINGS(Grade Rings) A. Use one of the following methods for grade adjustments of manhole or intake frame and cover assemblies: 6010—pg5 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers 1. Reinforced Concrete Adjustment Rings: Comply with ASTM C 478.Provide rings free from cracks, voids,and other defects. 2. High Density Polyethylene Adjustment Rings: Comply with ASTM D 1248 for recycled plastic. a. Test and certify material properties by the methods in the following table. Table 6010.02: Test Methods Property Test Method Acceptable Value Melt Flow Index ASTM D 1238 0.30 to 30 g/10 min. Density ASTM D 792 0.94 to 0.98 g/cm3 Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 2,000 to 5,000 lb/in2 b. Do not use polyethylene grade adjustment rings when they are exposed to HMA pavement or heat shrink infiltration barriers. c. When used in a single configuration,provide tapered adjustment ring with thickness that varies from 1/2 inch to 3 inches. d. Install adjustment rings on clean,flat surfaces according to the manufacturer's recommendations with the proper butyl rubber sealant/adhesive. 3. Expanded Polypropylene Adjustment Rings: Comply with ASTM D 4819 for expanded polypropylene when tested according to ASTM D 2375. a. Use adhesive meeting ASTM C 920,Type S,Grade N5,Class 25. b. Provide fmish rings with grooves on the lower surface and flat upper surface. c. Do not use when heat shrinkable infiltration barrier is used. B. Ensure the inside diameter of the adjustment ring is not less than the inside diameter of the manhole frame or not less than the inside dimension of the intake grate opening. 2.10 CASTINGS(Ring,Cover,Grate,and Extensions) A. Gray Cast Iron:AASHTO M 306. B. Load Capacity: Standard duty unless otherwise shown on the casting figures. 1. Standard Duty: Casting certified for 40,000 pound proof-load according to AASHTO M 306. 2. Light Duty: Casting certified according to requirements of AASHTO M 306 for a 16,000 pound proof-load(HS-20).40,000 pound proof-load is not required. C. Casting Types: 1. Manholes: The following table lists the manhole casting types. 6010—pg6 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Table 6010.03: Manhole Casting Types Figure Number of Ring/ Bolted Bolted Cover No. Casting Type Pieces Cover Frame (Floodable) Gasket 6010.601 SW-601,A 2 Fixed2 Yes No Yes' c 3 6010.601 SW-601,B 3 Adjustable3 No No Yes' v) 6010.601 SW-601,C 2 Fixed2 Yes Yes Yes' 6010.601 SW-601,D 3 Adjustable3 No Yes Yes' 6010.602 SW-602 E4 2 Fixed2 Yes No No 0 6010.602 SW-602,F4 3 Adjustable3 No No No 6010.602 SW-602,G4 2 Fixed No No No 'Machine bearing surfaces required. 2 Typically used with non-paved or flexible surfaces,including HMA,seal coat,gravel,and brick. 3 Typically used with PCC surfaces,including castings in concrete boxouts. 4 Storm sewer casting may include environmental symbols and/or messages such as"DUMP NO WASTE,DRAINS TO RIVER." 2. Intakes: a. Comply with Figures 6010.602,3010.603,6010.604 and the contract documents. b. Castings may include environmental symbols and/or messages such as"DUMP NO WASTE, DRAINS TO RIVER." 3. Manhole Casting Extension Ring: a. Match the dimensions of the existing ring and cover with an allowable diameter tolerance of— 1/4 inch for the frame ridge and+1/4 inch for the cover recess. b. Provide extension ring with height as required to raise the top of the casting to make it level or no more than 1/4 inch below the finished pavement surface.Maximum ring height is 3 inches. 2.11 ADDITIONAL MATERIALS FOR SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES A. Infiltration Barrier: 1. External Chimney Seal: a. Rubber Sleeve and Extension: 1) Corrugated;minimum thickness of 3/16 inches,according to ASTM C 923. 2) Minimum allowable vertical expansion of at least 2 inches. b. Compression Bands: 1) One-piece band assembly to compress sleeve or extension against manhole and casting surfaces. 2) 16 gauge ASTM C 923,Type 304 stainless steel,minimum 1 inch width,minimum adjustment range of 4 inches more than the manhole outside diameter. 3) For standard two-piece castings, shape top band to lock sleeve to manhole frame's base flange.For three-piece adjustable castings,shape top band to lock sleeve to upper piece of adjustable frame. 4) Stainless steel fasteners complying with ASTM F 593 and 594,Type 304. 2. Internal Chimney Seal: a. Rubber Sleeve and Extension: 1) Double pleated,minimum thickness 31/8 inch thick,according to ASTM C 923. 2) Minimum allowable vertical expansion of at least 2 inches. 3) Integrally formed expansion band recess top and bottom with multiple sealing fins. b. Expansion Bands: 1) One-piece band assembly to compress sleeve or extension against manhole and casting surfaces to make a watertight seal. 2) 16 gauge ASTM C 923,Type 304 stainless steel,minimum 1 inch width,minimum adjustment range of 2 inches more than the manhole inside diameter. 3) Positive stainless steel locking mechanism permanently securing the band in its expanded position after tightening. 6010—pg7 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers 3. Molded Shield: a. Barrier Shield: 1) Medium density polyethylene,according to ASTM D 1248. 2) Certified for 40,000 pound proof-load according to AASHTO M 306. 3) Diameter to match cone section and internal dimension of casting. b. Sealant: Butyl material meeting ASTM C 990. 4. Heat Shrink Sleeve: Heat-shrinkable wrap around sleeve designed for protection of buried and exposed sanitary sewer manholes.Do not use with polypropylene or polyethylene adjustment rings. a. Primer: Compatible with concrete,ductile and cast iron,and sleeve material. b. Sleeve and Backing: Property Standard Value Water Absorption ASTM D 570 0.05%maximum Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 2671 -40°F Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 2,900 psi minimum Elongation ASTM D 638 600%minimum Hardness ASTM D 2240 Shore D:46 Shrink Factor --- 40%minimum Thickness --- 0.1 inch minimum c. Adhesive: Softening point of 212°F maximum meeting ASTM E 28. B. Riser Section Coating: 1. Exterior: When exterior waterproof coating is specified,provide bituminous or coal tar coating. 2. Interior: When interior manhole lining is specified,provide lining according to Section 4010,2.01 (lined,reinforced concrete pipe). 2.12 INVERT A. Cast-in-place Base: Provide a cast-in-place invert with concrete complying with the requirements of Section 6010,2.02. B. Precast Base Section: 1. For sanitary sewers,provide a precast invert,unless otherwise allowed by the Engineer.Comply with Section 6010,3.01. 2. For storm sewers,provide a cast-in-place invert with concrete complying with the requirements of Section 6010,2.02. 2.13 STEPS A. Provide steps in all circular,precast manholes unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. B. Comply with ASTM C 478. C. Manufacture using polypropylene encased steel. D. Uniformly space steps at 12 to 16 inches. E. Align with vertical side of eccentric top section. F. Place first step no more than 36 inches from top of casting. 2.14 PRECAST CONCRETE TEE A. Tee and Eccentric Reducers: ASTM C 478. B. Composite Tee. Comply with Figure 6010.305.May be substituted for pipe diameters less than 48 inches. 2.15 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Material: Stainless steel or hot-dipped galvanized. 6010—pg8 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers B. Diameter: Minimum 1/2 inch diameter. C. Length:As required to pass through adjustment rings and into manhole or intake structure to embedment depth recommended by anchor manufacturer. 2.16 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL MATERIAL Comply with Section 3010 for bedding and backfill materials. 6010—pg9 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INSTALLATION OF MANHOLES AND INTAKES A. Excavation: Excavate according to Section 3010. B. Subgrade Preparation: 1. Cut Sections(Undisturbed Soil): Prepare subgrade to accurate elevation required to place structure base or subbase. 2. Fill Sections: Compact to 95%of maximum Standard Proctor Density and hand grade to accurate elevation required to place structure base or subbase,or install stabilization material as directed by the Engineer. 3. Unstable Soil: Install stabilization material as directed by the Engineer. C. Subbase: 1. Cast-in-place Structures:No subbase material is required. 2 Precast Structures: If precast structure is provided,install 8 inch thick pad of Class I bedding material a minimum of 12 inches outside footprint of the structure. D. Installation of Manhole or Intake Structure: When necessary,adjust wall height and depth of base to provide a minimum of 48 inches between form grade elevation and top of base. 1. Cast-in-place: Comply with Section 6010,3.02. 2. Precast: Comply with Section 6010,3.03. E. Pipes: Install and bed pipes and connect to manhole or intake.Install pipe flush with inside wall of structure.Place bedding and pipe embedment material according to Section 3010. 1. Cast-in-place Structures: a. Storm: Form structure walls around pipe. b. Sanitary: Form or core circular opening and install flexible,watertight gasket according to Section 6010,2.08.Keep void between pipe and manhole section free of debris and concrete. 2. Precast Storm Sewer Manholes or Intakes: If annular space between pipe and structure is less than 2 inches,fill with non-shrink grout.If annular space is 2 inches or greater,construct a concrete collar around the pipe according to Section 3010,3.05. 3. Precast Sanitary Sewer Manholes: Connect to structure with flexible,watertight gasket according to Section 3010,2.08.Keep void between pipe and manhole section free of debris and concrete. 4. Sanitary Sewer Manholes on Existing Pipe: Install waterstop according to Section 6010,2.08. F. Joint Sealant: 1. Storm Sewer Manhole: a. Install rubber 0-ring or profile gasket(precast structures). b. Apply bituminous jointing material or butyl sealant wrap to exterior of all sanitary sewer manhole joints. 2. Storm Sewer Manhole and Intakes: a. Apply bituminous jointing material or install rubber rope gasket. b. If indicated in the contract documents,apply engineering fabric wrap to joints. G. Invert: 1. Construct manhole or intake invert up to one-half of pipe diameter to produce a smooth half-pipe shape between pipe inverts. 2. Shape invert to provide a smooth transition between pipe inverts. 3. Slope invert top toward pipe 1/2 inch per foot perpendicular to flow line. 6010—pg 10 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers 4. For sanitary sewer,keep void between pipe and structure wall free of debris and concrete. 5. For precast inverts,remove any projections and repair any voids to provide a hydraulically smooth channel between ends of pipes. H. Top Sections: Install manhole eccentric cone or flat top section or install intake top. I. Adjustment Ring(s): 1. Bed each concrete ring with bituminous jointing material in trowelable or rope form. 2. Bed each polyethylene or expanded polypropylene ring with manufacturer's approved product and according to manufacturer's recommended installation procedure. 3. Construct manholes and intakes with the following adjustment ring stack heights: a. Minimum:4 inches for new manholes an intakes.No minimum for rehabilitation projects. b. Maximum: 12 inches for new manholes and intakes; 16 inches for existing manholes and intakes. 4. For greater adjustment,modify lower riser section(s). J. Casting: Install the type of casting specified in the contract documents and adjust to proper grade.Where a manhole or intake is to be in a paved area,adjust the casting to match the slope of the finished surface. When specified in the contract documents,attach a casting frame to the structure with four anchor bolts. K. Infiltration Barrier: Install on sanitary sewer manholes 1. Internal or External Chimney Seal: a. Do not use external chimney seal if seal will be permanently exposed to sunlight. b. Extend seal 3 inches below the lowest adjustment ring. c. Extend seal to 2 inches above the flange of the casting for a standard two-piece casting,or 2 inches above the top of the base section of the casting for an adjustable three-piece casting. d. Use multiple seals,if necessary. e. Install compression bands(external chimney seal)or expansion bands(internal chimney seal)to lock the rubber sleeve or extension into place and to provide a positive watertight seal. Once tightened,lock the bands into place.Use only manufacturer recommended installation tools and sealants 2. Molded Shield: a. Clean surface of structure cone section. b. Apply sealant to the top surface of the cone section.Use sufficient sealant to accommodate flaws in the surface of the cone section. c. Cut molded shield to height by adding the dimensions of the adjustment rings and casting height. Be sure not to interfere with seating of the lid into the casting frame. d. Seat the molded shield against the sealant on the cone section. e. Add adjustment rings and casting to meet fmal grade. 3. Heat Shrink Sleeve: a. Ensure all surfaces are clean,dry,and free of foreign objects and sharp edges. b. Warm the surface to drive off any moisture. c. Cut sleeve to required length per manufacturer's requirements. d. Apply primer to manhole and casting surface. e. Place sleeve according to manufacturer's requirements. f. Apply heat to the sleeve, smooth out wrinkles,and remove trapped air. g. Cut the sleeve at the casting gussets.Reheat to place the sleeve onto the casting. h. Trim off any excess material. L. Backfill and Compaction: 1. Place suitable backfill material after concrete in structure has reached at least 3,000 psi compressive strength or 550 psi flexural strength.If concrete strength is not determined,place backfill at least 14 calendar days after initial concrete placement. 6010—pg 11 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers 2. Place backfill material simultaneously on all sides of walls and structures so the fill is kept at approximately the same elevation at all times. 3. Compact the 3 feet closest to all walls using pneumatic or hand tampers only.Ensure proper and uniform compaction of backfill around structure. 3.02 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. Forms: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,B. 2. Form all cast-in-place manholes and intakes on both the inside and the outside face above the base. Do not form against excavated earthen surface. B. Reinforcing Steel: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Section 2404. 2. Lap bars a minimum of 36 diameters,unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 3. Provide a minimum of 3 inches of clearance for structure bases and 2 inches of clearance for walls and tops. C. Concrete Mixing: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2403.02,D. 2. When using ready-mixed concrete,comply with ASTM C 94. D. Concrete Placing: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,C. 2. Do not place concrete when the air temperature is less than 40°F without the approval of the Engineer.When placement of concrete below 40°F is allowed,comply with Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,F. 3. Place concrete continuously in each section until complete. Do not allow more than 30 minutes to elapse between depositing adjacent layers of concrete within each section. 4. Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,D for concrete vibration. 5. Form 1 1/2 inch by 3 inch keyed construction joints at locations shown in the contract documents. 6. Provide a broom finish on portions of structure that are to become part of exposed pavement. E. Stripping and Cleaning: 1. Remove forms for manhole and intake walls and tops according to Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,M. References to culverts include all sanitary and storm structures.When allowed 3.02 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE STRUCTURES by the Engineer,compressive strengths at six times the stated flexural strengths may be used in determining concrete strength of structure tops. 2. Finish surfaces according to Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,P.Give exposed surfaces a Class 2 finish. F. Curing: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,E. 2. For surfaces visible to the public,use only curing compounds complying with ASTM C 309,Type 1- D or Type 2. G. Exterior Loading: 1. Restrict exterior loads on concrete according to Iowa DOT Article 2403.03,N. 6010—pg 12 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers 2. When allowed by the Engineer,compressive strengths at six times the stated flexural strengths may be used. H. Repairs: After visual inspection of the completed manhole or intake,repair honeycomb areas,visible leaks,tie holes,or other damaged areas.Remove concrete webs or protrusions. I. Concrete Testing: The Engineer will conduct testing. 3.03 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PRECAST CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. Substitutions: If approved by the Engineer,precast structures may be substituted for designated cast-in- place structures.Comply with the requirements of Section 6010,3.02 or Iowa DOT Materials I.M.445. B. Cast-in-place Base: 1. Comply with Section 6010,3.02 for placement of concrete. 2. Ensure proper vertical and horizontal alignment of base riser section. C. Precast Base or Base with Integral Riser Section: Place base or base with integral riser section and ensure proper vertical and horizontal alignment. D. Additional Riser Sections: Install additional riser sections as required. E. Lift Holes: Install rubber plug in lift holes. Cover plug and hole with non-shrink grout. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT OF EXISTING MANHOLE OR INTAKE A. Casting Extension Rings: 1. Install casting extension rings only when specified in the contract documents,and only in conjunction with pavement overlays. 2. Install according to the manufacturer's recommendation and adjust for proper alignment. B. Minor Adjustment(Adding or Removing Adjustment Rings): 1. Remove casting. 2. Modify adjustment ring stack height by one of the following methods: a. Add adjustment rings as necessary to adjust existing manhole or intake to finished pavement grade or finished topsoil grade,to a maximum ring stack height of 16 inches.Bed each concrete ring with bituminous jointing material.Bed each polyethylene ring with manufacturer's approved product. b. Remove one or more adjustment rings,as appropriate,to reduce casting elevation. 3. Install new casting on modified adjustment ring stack.Existing casting may be reinstalled when specified in the contract documents. 4. Replace chimney seal for sanitary sewer manhole using only new materials. C. Major Adjustment(Adding,Removing,or Modifying Riser or Cone Section): When adjustment is greater than can be accomplished through adding or removing adjustment rings,a major adjustment will be required. 1. Remove casting. 2. Remove top. 3. Remove and replace or modify existing riser section and/or top section,as appropriate. 4. Install new frame and cover or grate.Existing casting may be reinstalled when specified in the contract documents. 5. Replace infiltration barrier for sanitary sewer manhole using only new materials. 3.05 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE OR INTAKE A. General: 6010—pg 13 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers 1. Remove existing invert as necessary to install pipe at required elevation and develop hydraulic channel. 2. Insert pipe into structure and trim end flush with inside wall of structure. 3. Place backfill material according to Section 3010. B. Concrete Collar: 1. For new pipes 12 inches or smaller,install two number 4 steel reinforcing hoops in collar around pipe.Pour concrete collar around pipe/structure junction to a minimum thickness and width of 6 inches,providing a minimum of 4 inches of concrete extending beyond the pipe opening. 2. For new pipes larger than 12 inches,install two number 4 steel reinforcing hoops in collar around pipe. Pour concrete collar around pipe/structure junction to minimum thickness and width of 9 inches, providing a minimum of 4 inches of concrete extending beyond the pipe opening. C. Sanitary Sewer: 1. General: a. Core new openings in existing manholes unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. b. Divert flow as necessary.Obtain approval of the diversion plan from the Engineer.Maintain sanitary sewer service at all times unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2. Cored Opening: a. Insert flexible watertight connector into new opening. b. Install and tighten internal expansion sleeve to hold flexible connector in place. c. Insert pipe through flexible connector and tighten external compression ring. d. Do not install grout or concrete collar for cored opening with flexible connector. 3. Cut and Chipped Opening(Knock-out): Use only when specified or allowed. a. Saw opening to approximate dimensions with a masonry saw. Saw to depth sufficient to sever reinforcing steel. b. Remove concrete and expand opening to a diameter at least 6 inches larger than the outside diameter of the new pipe. c. Cut off all reinforcing steel protruding from the structure wall. d. Install waterstop around new pipe centered within structure wall. e. Fill opening between structure and pipe with non-shrink grout. 3.05 CONNECTION TO EXISTING MANHOLE OR INTAKE(Continued) f. Construct concrete collar around pipe and exterior manhole opening. g. Provide pipe joint,non-shear coupling,or other approved flexible coupling within 2 feet of structure wall to allow for differential settlement between the new sewer and the structure. D. Storm Sewer: 1. Cut opening to manhole or intake to 3 to 6 inches beyond the outside of the pipe. 2. Fill opening between manhole or intake wall and outside of pipe with non-shrink grout or construct a concrete collar around the pipe according to Section 6010,3.05,B. 3.06 REMOVAL OF MANHOLE OR INTAKE A. Unless otherwise specified,remove the entire structure to a minimum of 10 feet below top of subgrade in paved areas or 10 feet below finished grade in other areas. B. Pipes: 1. Contact the Engineer to verify the sewer line is not in use. 2. Construct sewer plug by completely filling the end of the pipe with concrete.Force concrete into the end of the pipe for a distance of 16 inches,or one-half the pipe diameter,whichever is greater. 3. If specified in the contract documents,fill the line to be abandoned with flowable mortar or CLSM (comply with Section 3010)by gravity flow or pumping. 6010—pg14 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6010- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers C. Fill remaining structure using flowable mortar. D. Place compacted backfill over remaining structure as required for embankment or compacted backfill. 3.07 CLEANING,INSPECTION,AND TESTING Clean,inspect,and test structures according to Section 6030. END OF SECTION 6010—pg15 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6020- Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes REHABILITATION OF EXISTING MANHOLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES Rehabilitation of existing manholes 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Rehabilitate existing manholes to waterproof and to prevent inflow and infiltration,to prevent corrosion,or to reestablish the structural integrity of the manhole.Includes construction of structural liners,protective liners, and infiltration barriers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. Concrete mix design, if required by the Engineer. B. Catalog cuts of all mortar mixes,sealants,and liners. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS None. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Infiltration Barriers: 1. Rubber Chimney Seal: a. Measurement:Each rubber chimney seal installed on an existing manhole will be counted. b. Payment:Payment will be made at the unit price for each chimney seal. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,all necessary compression or expansion bands and extension sleeves as necessary to complete chimney seal. 2. Molded Shield: a. Measurement: Each molded shield installed on an existing manhole will be counted. b. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price for each molded shield. c. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,sealant. 3. Urethane Chimney Seal: a. Measurement: Each urethane chimney seal installed on an existing manhole will be counted. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each urethane chimney seal. B. In-Situ Manhole Replacement,Cast-in-place Concrete: 1. Measurement: The vertical dimension of in-situ manhole replacement will be measured in feet from the lowest flowline to the top of the rim. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per vertical foot. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,handling of sewer flows as required to properly complete the installation,invert overlay as recommended by the manufacturer,replacement of existing casting with a new casting,and testing the manhole upon completion. C. In-Situ Manhole Replacement,Cast-in-place Concrete with Plastic Liner: 6020—pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6020- Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes 1. Measurement: The vertical dimension of in-situ manhole replacement with plastic linear will be measured in feet from the lowest flowline to the top of the rim. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per vertical foot. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,handling of sewer flows as required to properly complete the installation,invert overlay as recommended by the manufacturer,replacement of existing casting with a new casting,sealing at the frame and cover, sealing pipe penetrations as recommended by the manufacturer,and testing the manhole upon completion. D. Manhole Lining with Centrifugally Cast Cementitious Mortar Liner with Epoxy Seal 1. Measurement: The vertical dimension of manhole lining will be measured for depth in feet from the bottom of the lining to the top of the lining for each liner thickness specified. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per vertical foot for each liner thickness. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,the handling of sewer flows during lining operations as required to properly complete the installation,and replacement of the existing casting with a new casting. 6020—pg 2 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6020- Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Rubber Chimney Seal: Comply with Section 6010,2.11 for external and internal rubber chimney seals. B. Molded Shield: Comply with Section 6010,2.11 for molded shields. C. Heat Shrink Sleeve: Comply with Section 6010,2.11 for heat shrink sleeves. D. Urethane Chimney Seal: Comply with the following table for the physical properties. Table 6020.01: Physical Properties Property ASTM Test Method Acceptable Value Elongation D 412 800%minimum Tensile Strength D 412 1150 psi,minimum Adhesive Strength D 903 175 lb/in,minimum Pressure Resistance C 1244 2 minutes 2.02 IN-SITU MANHOLE REPLACEMENT,CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Forming System: Provide an internal forming system capable of forming a new and structurally independent manhole wall within the existing manhole,with the specified thickness and conforming to the general shape of the existing manhole. B. Concrete: Type I/II Portland cement with 5/8 inch minus coarse aggregate with fiber reinforcement and water reducer,4,000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength or as approved by the Engineer. C. Plastic Liner: When specified,provide a PVC or PE plastic liner resistant to degradation by sulfuric acid. Use a liner capable of being attached to the exterior of the forming system during erection of the forms. Use a plastic liner with a ribbed or studded exterior surface suitable for anchoring to the newly formed interior wall. D. Casting: Provide new casting.Comply with Section 6010,2.10. 2.03 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR LINER WITH EPDXY SEAL A. Cementitious Lining: 1. Use a high-strength,high-build,corrosion-resistant mortar,based on Portland cement fortified with micro silica.Mixed mortar is to have a paste-like consistency that may be sprayed,cast,pumped,or gravity-flowed into any area 1/2 inch and larger. 2. Comply with the following table for physical properties. 6020—pg 3 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6020- Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes Table 6020.02:Physical Properties Property Value Unit Weight 125 pcf Set Time at 70°F ASTM C 403 240 minutes/440 minutes Initial Se t/Final Set Modulus of Elasticity ASTM C 469 180,000 psi/ 1,150,000 psi 24 hours/28 days Flexural Strength ASTM C 293 24 hour/28 days 650 psi/800 psi Compressive Strength ASTM C 109 3,000 psi/ 10,000 psi 24 hours/28 days Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 600 psi Shear Bond ASTM C 882 >1,000 psi Shrinkage ASTM C 157 None Chloride Permeability ASTM C 1202 <550 Coulombs 3. Use a lining containing a liquid admixture for the prevention of micro-biologically induced corrosion. B. Corrosion-Resistant Epoxy Lining: 1. Use a two-component 100%solids epoxy formulated for use in sewer systems. 2. Comply with the following table for physical properties. Table 6020.03:Physical Properties Property Value Dry Time 4-6 hours at 75°F Compressive Strength ASTM D 695 16,800 psi Flexural Strength ASTM D 790 13,900 psi Tensile Strength ASTM D 638 12,400 psi Hardness ASTM D 2240 68-72 Shore D Heat Distortion ASTM D 648 220°F Ultimate Elongation ASTM D 638 4.5% Adhesive Shear ASTM C 882 1,000 psi C. Casting: Provide new casting.Comply with Section 6010,2.10. 6020—pg 4 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6020- Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 INFILTRATION BARRIER A. Rubber Chimney Seal: Comply with Section 3010,3.01. B. Molded Shield: Comply with Section 6010, 3.01. C. Urethane Chimney Seal:Use only when specified in the contract documents. 1. Prepare the surface according to the manufacturer's recommendations, including sandblasting, pressure washing, sealing leaks or gaps,and drying the surface. 2. Apply primer,prepare product,and brush-apply the seal to a minimum thickness of 175 mils, covering 2 inches above the bottom of the frame and the entire adjustment ring area to 3 inches below the bottom adjustment ring. 3.02 IN-SITU MANHOLE REPLACEMENT,CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE A. Preparation:Prepare according to the forming system manufacturer's recommendations, including the following: 1. Clean the existing surface to remove loose material and debris. 2. Remove existing steps that might interfere with the erection of the forms. 3. Control infiltration that may affect placement of concrete. B. Installation: Install and test according to the forming system manufacturer's recommendations,including the following: 1. Place pipe extensions through the structure to maintain flow during installation. 2. Erect forms inside the manhole. Secure the assembled internal forms to prevent shifting and to provide sufficient stiffness and strength to prevent collapse. 3. Install a plastic linear when specified. 4. Seal the forms at the bottom of the manhole to ensure the concrete does not enter the sewer. 5. Carefully place concrete between the forms and the existing manhole walls.Place concrete from the bottom up to prevent segregation of concrete. 6. Consolidate concrete as required to fill all pockets,seams,and cracks within the existing manhole wall. 7. Remove the forms when the concrete has cured sufficiently. 8. Weld and test joints if a plastic liner is installed. 9. Apply a sealing strip around the circumference of the invert top where it meets the vertical wall and around all pipe penetrations to form a waterstop. 10. Overlay the invert top with concrete or high-strength mortar. Vary thickness from 3 inches at the wall to 1/2 inch at the edge of the channel. 11. Apply an epoxy lining to the invert top.Apply clean sand to the epoxy to create a non-slip surface. 12. Seal the plastic liner to the manhole casting and existing pipe stubs as recommended by the manufacturer. 13. Install new casting. 3.03 CENTRIFUGALLY CAST CEMENTITIOUS MORTAR LINER WITH EPDXY SEAL A. Surface Preparation:Prepare according to the manufacturer's recommendations,including the following: 1. Wash the interior with a high-pressure washer. 6020—pg 5 Standard Specifications Division 6- Structures for Sanitary and Storm Sewers Section 6020- Rehabilitation of Existing Manholes 2. Plug active leaks with the appropriate sealing material. B. Mortar Application:Apply according to the manufacturer's recommendations,including the following: 1. Apply with a rotating centrifugal casting applicator,beginning at the bottom of the manhole. 2. Retrieve the applicator head at the manufacturer's recommended speed to achieve the desired thickness. 3. Apply to the full required thickness utilizing multiple passes as necessary.Minimize the time between passes so subsequent passes are cast against fresh mortar. 4. Verify thickness with a wet gauge at several locations to ensure proper depth. 5. Hand-apply high-strength mortar to the invert surface.Vary thickness from 3 inches at the wall to 1/2 inch at the edge of the channel. C. Epoxy Seal Application: Seal according to the manufacturer's recommendations,including the following: 1. Apply with a rotating centrifugal casting applicator or airless sprayer onto the fresh mortar liner. 2. If the epoxy seal is applied more than 24 hours after application of the mortar liner,or if the mortar liner is contaminated,clean the liner and then apply the epoxy. D. Finishing: Install a new casting. 3.04 CLEANING,INSPECTION,AND TESTING Comply with Section 6030 for in-situ manhole replacement and centrifugally cast mortar lined rehabilitation. END OF SECTION 6020—pg 6 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pavement B. Curb and Gutter C. Overlays 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Includes the requirements for the construction of full depth PCC pavement,curb and gutter,and overlays. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. Two weeks prior to commencing any PCC pavement placement,submit a paving mix design for each different source of aggregate to be used for review and approval by the Engineer. Submit mixes or mix designs approved by the Iowa Department of Transportation or an independent testing laboratory. B. Maturity curves for paving mixes and maturity reading results. C. Submit all testing and certifications according to Section 7010,3.08. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 -General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. Aggregate Storage: Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2301.02,C. B. Cement and Fly Ash: Comply with Iowa Dot Article 2301.02,C. C. Admixtures: Store in suitable weather tight enclosures which will preserve quality. D. Reinforcing Steel: Store off ground on timbers or other supports. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: Complete elements of the work that can affect line and grade in advance of other open cut construction unless noted on plans. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS None. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. PCC Pavement: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards for each different thickness of PCC pavement. The area of manholes,intakes, or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement area. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for each thickness of PCC pavement. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,final trimming of subgrade or subbase,integral curb,bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing,surface curing and pavement protection,safety fencing,concrete for rigid headers,boxouts for fixtures,and pavement smoothness testing. B. Air Content Deficiency: 7010—pg1 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards for each different thickness of PCC pavement subject to a unit price reduction for air content deficiency according to Section 7010,3.08. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the reduced unit price according to Table 7010.03 for each thickness of PCC pavement. If there is an air content deficiency on a privately contracted roadway project,the Jurisdiction ultimately accepting ownership of the roadway will receive the penalty payment prior to acceptance of the work. C. Pavement Smoothness Deficiency: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards for each yards for each different thickness of PCC pavement subject to a unit price reduction for pavement smoothness according to Section 7010, 3.08. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the reduced unit price according to Table 7010.04 for each thickness of PCC pavement.If there is a pavement smoothness deficiency on a privately contracted roadway project,the Jurisdiction ultimately accepting ownership of the roadway will receive the penalty payment prior to acceptance of the work. D. PCC Pavement Thickness Deficiency: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards for each different thickness of PCC pavement that has deficient pavement thickness as determined in Table 7010.05. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the percentage of the unit price indicated in Table 7010.05 for each different thickness of PCC pavement. If there is a pavement thickness deficiency on a privately contracted roadway project,the Jurisdiction ultimately accepting ownership of the roadway will receive the penalty payment prior to acceptance of the work. E. Curb and Gutter: 1. Measurement:Measurement will be in linear feet measured along the face of the curb for each different width and thickness of curb and gutter. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear feet of curb and gutter. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,final subgrade/subbase preparation,bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing,surface curing and pavement protection,and boxouts for fixtures. F. Beam Curb: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in linear feet measured along the face of the curb. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear feet of beam curb. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,final subgrade/subbase preparation,bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing, surface curing and pavement protection,and boxouts for fixtures. G. Concrete Median: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards of concrete median. When the curb is integral with the pavement,the width will be measured from back of curb to back of curb. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard of concrete median. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,final subgrade/subbase preparation,bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing,surface curing and pavement protection,and boxouts for fixtures. H. Fixture Adjustment: Comply with Section 6010 for adjustment of manholes and intakes and Seciton 5020 for adjustment of water valves and fire hydrants. I. PCC Pavement Samples and Testing: 1. Measurement: Lump sum item;no measurement will be made. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the lump sum price for PCC pavement samples and testing. 7010—pg2 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 3. Includes: Lump sum price includes,but is no limited to,certified plant inspection,pavement thickness cores,profilograph pavement smoothness measurement(when required by the contract documents),and maturity testing. J. Granular Surfacing: Comply with Section 7030,Granular Driveway Surfacing, for granular surfacing material placed at intersecting roads,driveways,and turnouts. K. PCC Pavement Widening: 1. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards for each different thickness of PCC pavement widening.The area of manholes,intakes,or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement widening area. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for each thickness of PCC pavement widening. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,final subgrade/subbase preparation,integral curb, bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing,surface curing and pavement protection, safety fencing, concrete for rigid headers,boxouts for fixtures,and pavement smoothness. L. PCC Overlay: 1. PCC Overlay,Furnish Only: a. Measurement: Measurement will be in cubic yards of PCC furnished and incorporated for PCC overlay,including widening sections,partial depth patches,and irregular sections. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per cubic yard of PCC furnished and incorporated for overlay. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing the concrete mixture and delivery to the project site. 2. PCC Overlay,Place Only: a. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards of PCC overlay placed,including widening sections,partial depth patches,and irregular sections.The area of manholes,intakes,or other fixtures in the overlay will not be deducted from the measured overlay area. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard of PCC overlay placed. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,integral curb,bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing,surface curing and pavement protection, safety fencing,concrete for rigid headers, boxouts for fixtures,and pavement smoothness testing. 3. Surface Preparation for Bonded PCC Overlay: a. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards of pavement surface prepared for bonded PCC overlay. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard of pavement surface prepared for bonded PCC overlay. c. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to, sandblasting,shot blasting,scarification,and surface cleaning. 4. Surface Preparation for Unbonded PCC Overlay: a. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards of pavement scarified for unbounded PCC overlay. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard of pavement scarified for unbounded PCC overlay. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,scarification and surface cleaning. 5. HMA Stress Relief Course for Unbonded PCC Overlay: a. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards of HMA stress relief course for unbounded PCC overlay. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard of HMA stress relief course for unbounded PCC overlay. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,HMA mix,including binder,and placement. M. Pavement Removal: Comply with Section 7040. 7010—pg3 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 7010—pg4 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: Meet the requirements of Iowa DOT Section 4101 and Materials I.M.401,including Type I and Type II cements and blended hydraulic cements Type 1P,Type 1S,and Type IL. B. Supplementary Cementitious Materials(SCM): 1. Fly Ash: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4108. 2. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag(GGBFS): Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4108. 3. Limestone: Comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.401. C. Fine Aggregate for Concrete: 1. Meet the requirements of Iowa DOT Section 4110 and Materials I.M.409,Source Approvals for Aggregates. 2. Comply with the following gradation: Sieve Size Percent Passing 3/8" 100 No.4 90 to 100 No. 8 70 to 100 No.30 10 to 60 No.200 0 to 1.5 Iowa DOT Article 4109.02,Gradation No. 1 in the Aggregate Gradation Table. 3. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation,subject to materials available locally at the time of construction. D. Coarse Aggregate for Concrete: 1. Crushed stone particles with Class 2 durability complying with Iowa DOT Section 4115 and Materials I.M.409,Source Approvals for Aggregates. 2. Comply with one of the following gradations: Sieve Size Gradation No.3 Gradation No.4 Gradation No.5 Percent Passing Percent Passing Percent Passing 1 1/2" 100 100 1" 95 to 100 50 to 100 100 3/4" 30 to 100 90 to 100 1/2" 25 to 60 20 to 75 3/8" 5 to 55 20 to 55 No.4 O to 10 O to 10 O to 10 No. 8 0 to 5 0 to 5 0 to 5 No.200 0 to 1.5 0 to 1.5 0 to 1.5 Iowa DOT Article 4109.02,Gradation No. 3,4,and 5 in the Aggregate Gradation Table. 3. The Engineer may authorize a change in gradation,subject to materials available locally at the time of construction. E. Water Requirements: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4102.Potable water obtained from a municipal supply,suitable for drinking,may be accepted without testing. F. Admixtures:Meet the requirements for the liquid admixtures shown below.Other admixtures may be used subject to the approval of the Engineer. 7010—pg5 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1. Air Entrainment Admixture: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4103. 2. Retarding and Water Reducing Admixtures: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4103. 3. Accelerating admixtures(calcium chloride): Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2529.02. G. Bars: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4151 for tie bars and dowel bars.Meet the tie bar requirements for bar mats.All bars must be epoxy coated. H. Expansion Tubes: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4191. I. Metal Keyways: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4191. J. Supports for Bars: Comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.451.01. K. Joint Fillers and Sealers: 1. Joint Sealers: Comply with Iowa DOT Article 4136.02. 2. Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers and Sealers:Use the following types of preformed materials for filling expansion joints that comply with Iowa DOT Article 4136.03.When the type is not specified, use a resilient filler. • Resilient Filler • Flexible foam expansion joint filler • Tire buffings expansion joint filler • Elastomeric joint seals 3. Backer Rod: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4136. L. Liquied Curing Compound: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4105. M. Covering: 1. Burlap: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4104. 2. Plastic Film: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4106. 3. Insulating Cover: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4106. N. Grout Systems:Use polymer grouts that comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.491.11. 2.02 CONCRETE MIXES A. Mix Design: 1. Comply with Iowa DOT Class C or Class M mix meeting the requirements of Materials I.M. 529. 2. Ensure compatibility of all material combinations.If the concrete materials are not producing a workable concrete mixture,a change in the material may be required.Changes will be at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. B. Consistency and Workability: 1. Slump: a. Use an amount of mixing water that will produce workable concrete of uniform consistency. Unless specifically modified by the Engineer,ensure slump,measured according to Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 317, is no less than 1/2 inch or no more than 2 1/2 inches for machine fmish and no less than 1/2 inch and no more than 4 inches for hand finish. b. If it is not possible to produce concrete having the required consistency without exceeding the maximum allowable water to cement ratio specified,the cement content may be increased or water reducing admixture may be added.Obtain the Engineer's approval.Do not exceed the maximum water to cement ratio.Additional cement or water reduces will be added with no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. c. The basic absolute volume of water per unit volume of concrete is based on average conditions. If material characteristics require that the total quantity of water used to secure the required consistency reduces the batch yield(computed on the basis of absolute volumes of the batch 7010—pg6 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement quantities used)by more than 2.0%,the Engineer may adjust the proportions to correct the yield. This adjustment will not be a basis for adjustment of the contract unit price. 2. Air Content: Use an approved air entraining agent. a. For machine-placed pavement,use a target air content of 8%with a tolerance of plus or minus 2%when measured on the grade just prior to consolidation,as determined by Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 318.The target air content may be adjusted by the Engineer based on random tests of the consolidated concrete behind the paving machine.These additional tests will be used to consider the need for a target value change and will not be used in the acceptance decision. b. For hand-placed pavement,use a target content for hand finish of 7%with a tolerance of plus or minus 1.5%when measured on the grade and just prior to consolidation,as determined by Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 318. C. Use of Fly Ash and Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag(GGBFS)as Supplementary Cementitious Materials: Mix proportions for the various mixes using fly ash and GGBFS are included in Iowa DOT Materials I.M.529. The maximum allowable fly ash substitution rate is 20%.Do not use a GGBFS substitution rate of more than 35%by weight(mass).The total supplementary cementitious material substitution rate is not to exceed 40%.When Type IP or IS cement is used in the concrete mixture,only fly ash substitution will be allowed. Substitution of Type I/II cement with both GGBFS and fly ash will be allowed in ready mix concrete mixtures only.Between October 16 and March 15, supplementary cementitious materials will be allowed only when maturity method is used to determine time of opening. Transport,store,haul,and batch fly ash and GGBFS in such a manner to keep it dry. 2.03 PCC OVERLAYS Comply with Section 7010,2.01 and 2.02,except as modified below: A. PCC Bonded Overlays: 1. Concrete Mix Design: C-3WR or C-4WR for bonded overlays. 2. Aggregate: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4115 and Article 4109.02,Gradation No. 3 and 5 in the Aggregate Gradation Table. a. Use the same coarse aggregate type(crushed limestone or gravel)as the existing pavement as specified in the contract documents. b. Use the maximum nominal coarse aggregate size that is no greater than one-third of the overlay thickness. B. HMA Stress Relief Course for Unbonded PCC Overlays: 1. Asphalt Binder:PG 58-28. 2. Mixture: 300,000 ESAL,3/8 inch mix,per Iowa DOT Section 2303. a. Target air voids is 3%. b. No maximum film thickness restriction. c. No.minimum filler/bitumen ratio restriction. 3. Aggregate: a. Type B. b. No percent crushed particle requirement. c. Gradation cannot fall below the restricted zone. 7010—pg7 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT A. Batching and Mixing Equipment: 1. General: a. Weighing and Proportioning Equipment: Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2001.20. b. Mixing Equipment: Comply with Iowa DOT Article 2001.21. c. Material Bins: Involves any structure in which materials are stored.Each part of any bin, including foundations and supports,must be adequate to withstand any stress to which it might be subjected to while in use. 2. Batching: a. Ensure the batching plant is Iowa DOT calibrated and approved.Provide copy of current calibrations and approvals. b. Coordinate the batch plant operation and batch trucks with the paving operation in order to ensure a steady supply of materials. c. Operate the batch plant and trucks to minimize dust,noise, or truck nuisances. 3. Mixing: a. Construction or Stationary Mixer: 1) Ensure the concrete is uniform in composition and consistency.If this condition is not produced because of the size of the batch,the size of the batch may be reduced or the mixing time increased,or both,until this result is obtained.If non-uniform,corrective action must be taken. 2) Ensure the methods of delivering and handling the concrete are such that objectionable segregation or damage to the concrete will not occur,and they will facilitate placing with a minimum of handling. b. Ready Mixed Concrete: 1) Ensure the concrete is uniform in composition and consistency.If non-uniform,concrete producers must take corrective action. 2) Ready mixed concrete is defined as concrete proportioned in a central plant and mixed in a stationary mixer for transportation in trucks without agitation,proportioned at a central plant, and only partially mixed in a stationary mixer for transportation and finish mixing in a transit mixer,or proportioned at a central plant,and then mixed in a transit mixer prior to or during transit. 3) When necessary to add additional mixing water at the site of placement,mix the batch at least an additional 30 revolutions of the drum at mixing speed. 4) Ensure each vehicle in which concrete will be delivered is capable of discharging concrete having a slump not over 2 inches at an overall rate for its entire load of not less than 1.25 cubic yards per minute.Ensure the concrete is delivered at a rate sufficient to maintain a sustained rate of progress of not less than 100 feet per hour for the width and depth of pavement to be placed. c. All Methods: Identify each truck load by a plant charge ticket showing plant name,contractor, project data,quantity,class,time batched,and water added at site. B. Concrete Placement Equipment: 1. Consolidating and Finishing Equipment: a. Use a paving machines that meets all of the following: 1) Is designed for the specific purpose of placing,consolidating,and finishing concrete pavement. 2) Develops vertical edges on the pavement. 3) Is self propelled and equipped with a means for spreading the concrete to a uniform depth before it enters that throat. 7010—pg8 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 4) Vibrates the concrete to the full width and depth being placed in a single passage.Use vibrating tubes or arms working in the concrete or a vibrating pan operating on the surface of the concrete. 5) Produces a surface reasonably free of voids and tears. 6) When the paver is operated on previously placed concrete,prevent damage to the pavement surface. 7) For slip form pavers,use a paver equipped with automatic horizontal and vertical grade controls. b. Hand methods utilizing air screeds and vibrating screeds may be used for short pavement runs, cul-de-sacs,driveways,and some intersections. 2. Vibrators for Machine Paving: a. Consolidate,with a single pass of an approved internal or surface vibrator,the full width and depth of concrete requiring a finishing machine,Operate internal vibrators within a frequency range of 4,000 to 8,000 vibrations per minute. The Engineer may authorize the minimum vibration frequency to be lowered to 3,500 vibrations per minute for particular sections of paving,such as superelevations. Operate surface vibrators within a frequency range of 3,500 to 6,000 vibrations per minute. b. Avoid operating vibrators in a manner to cause a separation of the mix ingredients,either a downward displacement of large aggregate particles of an accumulation of laitance on the surface of the concrete. When forward motion of the paver is reduced,vibrator frequency may need to be reduced to avoid separation of the mix. c. If a vibrator fails to operate within the specifications,repair or change the vibrator before the paving begins: • The following day,or • The same day if the continuous paving that day is stopped at a header or at the end of a session. d. If two adjacent vibrators fail to operate within the specifications,stop the paving operation and repair or replace the vibrators. e. Stop vibrators whenever forward motion of the paver is stopped. f. Set the internal vibrator penetration depth into the concrete pavement to mid slab or as deep as possible while passing above reinforcing steel.Provide an operating position locking device so that no part of the vibrating unit can be lowered to the extent that it will come in contact with reinforcing steel or tie bars while paving. g. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommendations for vibrator horizontal spacing.Do not exceed 16 inches from center to center. h. Monut the longitudinal axis of the vibrator body approximately parallel to the direction of paving.Tilt the trailing end of each vibrator downward to an approximate slope of 15 degrees below horizontal. i. Use vibrators that meet or exceed the following specifications at eh manufacturer's design frequency of 10,000 vpm: 1) Amplitude(peak to peak)0.070 inches. 2) Centrifugal force 1,200 pounds. 3. Vibrators for Hand Methods: Use a vibration rate between 3,500 to 6,000 vibrations per minute, and use an amplitude sufficient to be perceptible on the surface of the concrete more than 12 inches from the vibrating unit. 4. Hand Finishing Equipment: Provide all finishing tools necessary for proper finishing of the concrete including straightedges for checking and correcting fmished concrete surfaces. 5. Forms: a. Rigid Forms: Steel,minimum thickness of 5 gage,height as least equal to design thickness of pavement with base width at least 6 inches. 1) Minimum section length of 10 feet,joint connections designed to allow horizontal and vertical adjustment with locking device to hold abutting sections firmly in alignment. 2) Bracing,support,and staking must prevent deflection or movement of forms. b. Flexible Forms:Use steel or wood flexible forms for curves with a radius less than 100 feet. 7010—pg9 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1) Bracing,support,and staking must prevent deflection or movement of forms. 2) Ensure that forms used to shape back of curbs at returns have height at least equal to design thickness of pavement and curb height. 3) Forms must be free from scale and surface irregularities. 6. Curing Equipment:Use pressure sprayer capable of applying a continuous uniform film of curing compound.Use equipment with a shield if wind conditions do not allow proper coverage 7. Concrete Saws: Use power operated concrete saws capable of cutting hardened concrete neatly. 8. Joint Sealing Equipment: Use equipment capable of cleaning the joint and heating and installing sealant in joints according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 PAVEMENT CONSTRUCTION A. Removal of Pavement: Comply with Section 7040,3.02. B. Final Subgrade/Subbase Preparation: 1. General: a. Meet the requirements of Section 2010 for subgrade construction, subgrade treatment,and subbase construction. b. Trim the subgrade or subbase to the final grade for placement of concrete. c. Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer,the subgrade or subbase,at time of placing concrete for concrete pavement,must be in a uniformly moist but not muddy condition to a depth of not less than 1 inch. 2. Subgrade and Subbase Loading: a. Travel of concrete delivery trucks on a subgrade or subbase must be approved by the Engineer. In such cases,watering of the subgrade or subbase must be limited to just ahead of the paving machine. b. Enter and exit from side streets to minimize repetitive loading on the subgrade or subbase by concrete trucks. c. Do not allow loads in excess of the legal axle load on the completed subgrade or subbase. d. Partially loaded trucks may be required. e. If subgrade or subbase failure occurs,coordinate the repair with the Engineer. 3. Paving Suspended: a. Suspend the paving operation where subgrade or subbase stability has been lost. b. Do not place concrete on a subgrade or subbase that has become unstable,bears ruts or tire marks of equipment,or that is excessively softened by rain until such subgrade or subbase has been reconsolidated and reshaped to correct the objectionable condition. c. If necessary, scarify to a minimum depth of 6 inches,aerating,and recompacting at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority.Meet the compaction requirements of Section 2010,3.06. 4. Maintenance of Subgrade or Subbase: Maintain the completed subgrade or subbase during subsequent construction activities. C. Surface Fixture Adjustment: 1. Adjust manhole frames and other fixtures within area to be paved to conform to fmished surface. Comply with Section 6010,3.04 for manhole adjustments and Section 5020,3.04 for water fixture adjustments. 2. Clean outside of fixtures to depth of pavement before concrete placement. 3. Construct boxouts where allowed for later adjustment of fixtures. See Figure 7010.103 for the size and shape of the boxout. D. Setting of Forms: When forms are used,meet the following requirements. 1. Ensure forms have sufficient strength to support paving operations being used. 7010—pg10 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 2. Set base of forms at or below subgrade elevation with top of forms at pavement surface elevation. With Engineer approval,extra height forms may be used to shape the back of integral curb and edge of pavement; set base at or below subgrade elevation with top of form at top of curb elevation. 3. Place and secure forms to required grade and alignment.Do not vary the top face of the form from a true plane by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,and do not vary the vertical face from a true plane by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. 4. If the soil supporting the forms is softened by rain or standing water so that the forms are inadequately supported,or if voids occur under the forms,remove forms.Rework subgrade to proper elevation and density,and reinstall forms. 5. Ensure forms are free of latent concrete and coated with release agent before concrete is placed. E. Bar and Reinforcement Placement: Ensure bars are clean,straight,free from distortion and rust,and are firmly secured in position as specified in the contract documents.Place all bars in approved storage to prevent damage;do not distribute along the work site except as needed to avoid delay in paving. 1. Tie Bars: a. Place bars prior to vibration.For slip form paving,tie bars may be installed after vibration, provided the concrete is consolidated around the bars.Bars may be supported by approved chairs or may be placed in position by a machine or method approved by the Engineer. b. Use approved continuous bolsters with runners to support reinforcement for bridge approach sections.Place the supports transversely across the approach and space them longitudinally no greater than 4 feet.For double reinforced approach sections the top layer of reinforcing may be chaired off the bottom layer of reinforcing using approved continuous high chairs with runners, provided they are positioned directly above the continuous bolsters with runners supporting the bottom layer of reinforcing.Hold epoxy coated reinforcing steel in place with epoxy or plastic coated bar supports and epoxy or plastic coated tie wires. 2. Dowel Bar Assemblies: a. When dowel bar assemblies are required in the contract documents,accurately place these assemblies as shown.To prevent their movement during subsequent concrete paving operations, securely stake or fasten to the base to line and grade. b. Do not use assemblies that are damaged prior to placement. If assemblies are damaged after placement,replace prior to paving.Ensure horizontal and vertical alignment of the load transfer bars does not exceed 1/4 inch from parallel to line and grade.Place each assembly so the bars are in a horizontal plane at T/2± 1/2 inch. c. Check the placement of each assembly and the position of the bars within the assembly using a suitable template or other device approved by the Engineer.If the assembly is found to be placed outside of the above tolerances,correct the placement. d. Cutting the tie wires of the load transfer assemblies is optional. 3. Bar Mats for Reinforced Pavement: a. When reinforced pavement is specified,assemble bar mats accordingly and firmly fastened together at all bar intersections. b. Place,secure,latch,and tie bar mats for a continuous mat as specified in the contract documents. Displacement during concrete placement operations is not allowed. c. Use chairs to ensure proper placement of bar mats. 4. Tie Bars and Dowel Bars in Existing Pavement: a. When anchoring in existing concrete,use a grout system according to the manufacturer's instructions.Obtain the Engineer's approval for the grout system. b. For horizontal installations,use either a pressure injection system with mechanical proportioning and mixing,or use encapsulated chemical anchors.Install as follows: 1) Ensure drilled holes to receive the grout match the dimensions and spacing specified in the contract documents.When not specified in the contract documents,the maximum nominal diameter of the hole must be 1/8 inch larger than the outside diameter of the dowel or bar,or as recommended by the manufacturer.Drill holes for tie bars into the face of the existing pavement at midpoint.To ensure proper horizontal alignment,do not allow any hole 7010—pg11 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement misalignments to exceed 1/4 inch in the vertical or horizontal plane.Clean the hole with compressed air immediately prior to placing the grout. 2) Use a polymer grout to secure the dowels in the existing pavement.Inject the grout into the rear of the hole with pressure.Use sufficient grout so that when the bar to be grouted is placed in position,excess grout will be forced out the front of the hole.Rotate the bar during the insertion process to ensure complete coating with the ground material.Hand proportioning and mixing is not allowed. 3) If using grout with approved encapsulated anchors,install according to the manufacturer's recommendations. 4) Use horizontal installation procedures for vertical or angled installations;however,pourable grouts may be used.Pourable grouts must be mechanically mixed. F. Concrete Pavement Placement: 1. Use paving machine for all uniform width pavements 8 1/2 feet or more in width and 250 feet or more in length,unless alternate methods are approved by the Engineer. Screeds may be used on short pavement runs up to 250 feet. 2. Place,consolidate,and finish the concrete to the full depth and width conforming to the specified crown and cross-section in a single operation. 3. Keep a uniform pile of concrete in front of the paving machine,up to a maximum of 6 to 8 inches above the design surface elevation.Distribute and spread the concrete as soon as placed.A mechanical concrete spreader may be used. 4. Deposit the concrete upon the in-place bars keeping segregation to a minimum. 5. Use shovels,not rakes,to do necessary hand spreading and spading. 6. Do not allow the edges of pavement,including all longitudinal construction joints,to deviate from the line shown on the plans by more than 1/2 inch at any point. 7. If the paving machine operates on adjacent pavement,protect pavement from damage. 8. When placing by had methods,consolidate the concrete by using vibrating units.Use a definite system or pattern in the operation of the vibrator so the full width of concrete in each linear foot of lane will receive adequate and uniform consolidation.The system and methods of vibrating is subject to approval of the Engineer.Do not use vibrating equipment as a tool for moving concrete laterally. G. Integral Curbs: Integral curbs are placed with the pavement in a single paving machine operation; however,hand methods may be allowed for radius,returns,and sections of curb and gutter 100 feet or less in length or in other special sections where mechanical equipment cannot be used. 1. Pave,edge,protect,saw,and cure curb in same manner as pavement. 2. Finish curb as rapidly as finishing operations on pavement permit.Maximum distance behind paving machine is 100 feet. 3. Complete final finish on curbs by hand methods,including the use of a 6 foot straightedge. 4. Check surfaces of curb and gutter with 10 foot straightedge;correct variations greater than 1/8 inch. 5. For drop curb at driveways and where sidewalks intersect streets,use forms to shape the backs of such curbs. 6. When using hand methods for building curb,the following additional requirements will apply: a. Remove free water,latency,dust,leaves,or other foreign matter from the slab prior to placing concrete for curb. b. Use freshly mixed concrete;do not store concrete in receptacles at side of pavement for use in curb at a later time;do not use concrete requiring retempering. c. Consolidate curb concrete to obtain adequate bond with the pavement slab and to eliminate honeycomb in the curb.Avoid disturbing the alignment of forms or the gutter flow line. H. Finishing: 7010—pg 12 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1. Grade and Crown: Promptly after concrete has been placed and vibrated,strike off the surface to the true section by the screed.Finish the surface true to crown and grade. 2. Watering the Surface: The practice of lubricating the pavement surface by sprinkling water by spray,brush,or other methods to afford greater ease in finishing operation is not allowed. 3. Floats:Finish surface with wood or magnesium floats; finish from both sides simultaneously if pavement is placed is placed to full width with one pass of paving machine. 4. Straightedging: a. After the longitudinal floating has been completed and the excess water has been removed,and while the concrete is still plastic,test the pavement surface for trueness. b. Immediately fill any depressions found with freshly mixed concrete,struck off,consolidated,and refinished. c. Check surface longitudinally while concrete is still plastic; correct any surface deviations greater than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 5. Surface Treatment: a. Drag Surface Treatment: Unless otherwise specified,texture the fmished surface with an artificial turf or burlap drag treatment. 1) Pull the artificial turf or burlap drag longitudinally over the finished surface to produce a tight,uniform,textured surface,and round the edges in a workmanlike manner. 2) Remove the artificial turf or burlap drag from the pavement surface at regular intervals and clean with water to remove accumulated concrete from the fabric in order to maintain a consistent finished texture. 3) When the desired texture is not attained,the Engineer may require the final finish be a broom finish. b. Surface Tining: When surface tining is specified,use a longitudinal tining.Under special circumstances,when specified in the contract documents,transverse tining may be required. 1) Longitudinal: a) Complete longitudinal surface tining using a machine with a wire broom or comb.For small or irregular areas,or during equipment breakdown,hand methods may be used. Use a broom or comb with a single row of tines 1/8 inch(+/- 1/64 inch)in width and uniformly spaced at 3/4 inch intervals.The depth of the grooves must be a minimum of 1/8 inch to a maximum of 3/16 inch in the plastic concrete. b) Use equipment with horizontal and vertical string line controls to ensure straight grooves. c) Conduct this operation at such time and in such manner that the desired surface texture will be achieved while minimizing displacement of the larger aggregate particles and before the surface permanently sets. d) At longitudinal joints, leave a 2 to 3 inch wide strip of pavement surface(centered along the joint)that is not grooved for the length of the joint. 2) Transverse: a) If transverse surface tining is required or allowed,use a machine with a wire broom or comb.For small or irregular areas,or during equipment breakdown,hand methods may be used.Use a broom or comb with a single row of tines 1/8 inch(+/- 1/64 inch)in width and randomly spaced from 3/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch with no more than 50%of the spacing exceeding 1 inch.The depth of the grooves must be a minimum of 1/8 inch to a maximum of approximately 3/16 inch in the plastic concrete. b) Conduct this operation at such time and in such manner that the desired surface texture will be achieved while minimizing displacement of the larger aggregate particles and before the surface permanently sets. c) Where abutting pavement is to be placed,the tining should extend as close to the edge as possible without damaging the edge. d) If abutting pavement is not to be placed,do not tine the 6 inch area nearest the edge or 1 foot from the face of the curb. 7010—pg 13 Division 7- Streets and Related Work Standard Specifications Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 6. Edge Finish: Before the concrete has taken its initial set,finish all edges of the pavement with an 1/8 inch radius edging tool. I. Surface Curing: 1. Apply liquid curing compound in a fine spray to form a continuous,uniform film on the horizontal surface and vertical edges of pavement,curbs,and back of curbs immediately after surface moisture has disappeared,but no later than 30 minutes after finishing,With approval of the Engineer,the timing of cure application may be adjusted due to varying weather conditions and concrete mix properties to ensure acceptable macrotexture is achieved. a. Use a white pigment liquid curing compound for concrete not receiving an asphalt overlay.When specified in the contract documents,use a linseed oil solution. b. Use a dark-colored curing compound for concrete receiving as asphalt overlay. 2. Apply compound with power sprayer;rate of application not less than 15 square yards per gallon (0.067 gallon per square yard);do not dilute compound.For concrete receiving an asphalt overlay, use a minimum rate for dark-colored cure of 12.5 square yards per gallon(0.08 gallon per square yards). 3. Ensure liquid curing materials are well agitated in the supply drum or tank immediately before transfer to the sprayer.Keep curing materials well agitated during application. 4. Hand operated sprayers may be used for small and irregular areas. 5. If forms are used,apply to pavement edges and back of curbs within 30 minutes after forms are removed. 6. If,due to other operations,the coating is damaged within 72 hours after being applied,immediately re-coat the affected areas. Coating of the sawed surface with curing compound will not be allowed on joints that are to be sealed.When pavement is opened to traffic prior to 72 hours after application of the curing coating,a re-coating will not be required. J. Construction of Joints: 1. General: a. Construct joints of the type,dimensions,and at the locations specified in the contract documents. See the 7010 figures. b. Place longitudinal joints coincident with or parallel to the pavement centerline. c. Place all transverse joints at right angles to the centerline and extend the full width of the pavement. d. Place all joints perpendicular to the finished grade of the pavement and do not allow the alignment across the joint to vary from a straight line by more than 1 inch. e. Exercise care in placing,consolidating,and finishing the concrete at all joints. 2. Saw Joints: a. Mark joint locations with a string line before sawing. b. Begin transverse joint sawing as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to allow sawing without raveling or moving of aggregate. Saw joints before uncontrolled cracking takes place. c. Saw all joints in a single cutting operation for a specific joint.Make saw cuts true to line and to the dimensions specified in the contract documents. d. Discontinue sawing a joint if a crack develops ahead of the saw. e. Saw longitudinal joints within 24 hours of the concrete being placed. f. If necessary,continue the sawing operations both day and night. g. The concrete must be capable of supporting the sawing operations to allow the use of an early green concrete saw. h. Repair or replace pavement with uncontrolled or random cracking at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority.Use repair methods approved by the Engineer.Repair or replace at the direction of the Engineer. i. Use wet sawing for dust control when specified in the contract documents. j. Where boxouts occur in pavement,construct joints as shown on Figures 7010.103 and 7010.904. 7010—pg14 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 3. Construction Joints: a. Place longitudinal and transverse construction joints where specified in the contract documents, at boxouts,and at headers. b. Locate and place forms for boxouts on grade prior to paving as shown on Figures 7010.103 and 70 10.904. c. If concrete placement is delayed for more than 30 minutes or at the end of each day,construct a Days Work(DW)or a Rigid Tie(RT)transverse construction joint within 5 feet of a planned transverse contraction joint. d. Finish the edges of the pavement at construction joints with a 1/8 inch radius edging tool. 4. Expansion Joints: a. Install expansion joints as specified in the contract documents. b. Prevent movement of or damage to joint assembly when placing concrete;set joint material low enough to clear the finish machine. c. Construct double width expansion joint in curb over expansion joint in pavement. The backside of the joint must be clear of concrete. d. Align the expansion joint straight and true.After the mechanical finishing equipment has passed over the joint,check the joint for movement.If movement in excess of 1/2 inch has occurred, immediately correct the installation to its intended position. e. If joint fillers are assembled in sections,or it joints as a whole are constructed in sections,do not allow offsets between adjacent fillers. f. Where more than one section is used in a joint, securely lace or clip the sections together. g. Supplemental vibration equipment is required for proper consolidation of the concrete. h. After the surface finishing has been completed,fmish the edge of the joint with a 1/8 inch edging tool. K. Joint Sealing: 1. Timing: a. Unless otherwise allowed or approved by the Engineer,before any portion of the pavement is opened to the Contractor's equipment of to general traffic,clean and seal joints that require sealing. b. The Engineer may limit the wheel loads and axle loads of equipment operating on the pavement during this operation,if prior to the age and strength specified in Section 7010,3.06.Additional tests to determine the pavement strength may be required. 2. Cleaning: a. For those joints that are not to be sealed,cleaning is not required. b. Within 3 hours after a joint has been wet sawed to the finished dimension,flush the wet sawing residue away from the sawed faces using a high pressure water blast operating with a minimum pressure of 1,000 pounds per square inch. Within 3 hours after a joint has been dry sawed to the finished dimension,blow the dry sawing residue from the joint using air compressors that provide moisture and oil free compressed air. c. Immediately prior to installation of sealant,clean joints with an air blast.Do not perform sealing until visual examination verifies the joint surfaces appear dry, in addition to being clear of dust and contamination. 3. Sealing: a. Prepare and install joint sealer in the joint and to the proper level specified in the contract documents and as recommended by the manufacturer. b. Heat hot-poured sealers in a thermostatically controlled heating kettle;heat the material to the temperature required for use,but not above that recommended by the manufacturer.After sealing,remove excess sealer from the pavement surface. c. Seal joints the same day they are cleaned.Apply sealant only when the joint surfaces appear dry by visual examination. d. Place joint sealer only when the pavement and ambient air temperatures are 40°F or above. When near this minimum,additional air blasting or drying time,or both,may be necessary to ensure a satisfactory bond to the joint faces. When this sealer cannot be properly placed due to 7010—pg 15 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement late fall work,submit a joint construction plan and sealing details to the Engineer for approval before commencing paving.Delay the cleaning,sealing,and,if required,resawing of joints until the following spring.This delay requires the Engineer's approval. e. When surface correction is required,repair seals damaged from the corrective work.Joint preparation,cleaning,and sealing may be delayed until after corrective work,provided the pavement is not opened to traffic before corrective work is performed. L. Pavement Backfill:Following slipform paving operations,place backfill material along the pavement within 48 hours of pavement attaining opening strength or as directed by the Engineer to prevent flow of water and any subsequent damage caused by undermining of the pavement.Prior to placement of full backfill material,construct check dams or other protection as appropriate to ensure no damage to the subgrade and/or subbase occurs. M. Form Removal: 1. Timing: a. Remove forms after the initial set of the concrete has taken place. b. Remove stakes and forms with care to prevent cracking,spalling,or over stressing concrete. If damage does occur,repairs will be made as required by the Engineer. 2. Honeycomb Repair: a. When the forms are removed,fill honeycombs with mortar composed of 1 part cement and 2 parts fine aggregate by weight. b. If the honeycombing is to the degree and nature that it is considered by the Engineer as defective work,remove and replace at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. 3. Paving Protection: In the area adjacent to the curbs and pavement edge,immediately place backfill after the forms are removed.Construct dams or other protection to ensure that no saturation or erosion of the subgrade under or near the pavement occurs.This may include check dams,pumping,etc. 3.03 CURB AND GUTTER CONSTRUCTION(see Figure 7010.102) A. Complete the construction of curb and gutter separate from pavement in the same manner as for pavement in Section 7010,3.02. B. Use a paving machine for curb and gutter.For curb and gutter sections less than 250 feet,hand finish methods may be used. 3.04 OVERLAY CONSTRUCTION Construct overlays in the same manner as PCC pavement,except as modified herein. A. Bonded Overlays: 1. Surface Preparation: a. Over PCC: 1) Remove dirt,oil,foreign material,or concrete laitance from existing pavement surface by shot blasting or sandblasting. 2) Scarify to a nominal depth of 1/4 inch. 3) Sweep and air blast surface to remove any loose dirt or debris.Keep air blasting operations as close to overlay operations as possible to prevent any resettlement of debris onto previously cleaned area. b. Over HMA: 1) Scarify to the depth specified in the contract documents,but no less than 1/4 inch.Trim high spots in the existing asphalt surface at the direction of the Engineer. 2) Sweep and air blast surface to remove any loose dirt or debris.Keep air blasting operations as close to overlay operations as possible to prevent any resettlement of debris onto previously cleaned area. 2. Placing and Finishing: a. Surface Condition:Ensure the prepared surface is dry to allow some absorption of the concrete mortar. 7010—pg16 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement b. Jointing: 1) Over PCC: Use a reliable method to mark the location of tall joints to be matched. a) Longitudinal: Saw directly over existing joints full depth. b) Transverse: Saw directly over existing joints full depth of the overlay plus 0.5 inches. 2) Over HMA: a) Longitudinal: Saw to a depth of one third the overlay thickness. b) Transverse: Saw to a depth of one fourth the overlay thickness with a conventional saw or no less than 1.25 inches with an early entry saw. c. Curing:Apply cure material at twice the normal rate of application. d. Restrictions: 1) Air Temperature:Do not place overlay concrete when air or existing pavement surface is below 40°F. 2) Pavement Temperature:Do not place overlay on HMA when the pavement surface temperature exceeds 120°F.If the surface of the HMA is above 110°F,the Contractor may apply water to the surface of the HMA ahead of the paving operation in order to cool the surface.Apply water far enough in advance of the paving operation so that the surface will dry from evaporation before concrete is placed.Do not apply water to the surface of the pavement when the HMA surface temperature is below 100°F. 3) Time of Year:Do not place bonded overlays from October 1 to May 31. B. Unbonded Overlays: 1. Surface Preparation: Clean the existing pavement surface immediately prior to paving to remove dirt or debris.Trim high spots in the existing asphalt surface as specified in the contract documents. Do not scarify the existing PCC surface if an HMA stress relief course will be constructed. 2. Placing and Finishing: a. Surface Condition: Ensure the prepared surface is dry to allow some absorption of the concrete mortar. b. HMA Stress Relief Course: Place HMA stress relief course over existing PCC pavement when specified in the contract documents.Ensure a minimum compaction of 94%of laboratory density for the HMA layer.Use static steel wheeled rollers only. c. Jointing: 1) Longitudinal: Saw to a depth of one third the overlay thickness. 2) Transverse: Saw to a depth of one fourth the overlay thickness with a conventional saw or no less than 1.25 inches with an early entry saw. d. Curing:Apply cure material at twice the normal application rate. e. Restrictions: 1) Air Temperature: Do not place concrete overlay when air or existing pavement surface is below 40°F. 2) Pavement Temperature: Do not place overlay on HMA when the pavement surface temperature exceeds 120°F.If the surface of the HMA is above 110°F,the Contractor may apply water to the surface of the HMA ahead of the paving operation in order to cool the surface.Apply water far enough in advance of the paving operation so that the surface will dry from evaporation before concrete is placed.Do not apply water to the surface of the pavement when the HMA surface temperature is below 100°F. 3.05 PAVEMENT PROTECTION A. Weather Conditions:Do not place concrete when stormy or inclement weather or temperature prevents good workmanship. Temperature restrictions and protection requirements may be modified by the Engineer under unusual conditions. 1. Cold Weather: a. Paving: Do not place aggregates containing frozen lumps,and do not place concrete on a frozen subgrade or subbase. Take all necessary actions to prevent the pavement from freezing. 7010—pg 17 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1) Concrete mixing and placement may be started,if weather conditions are favorable,when the air temperature is at least 34°F and rising.At the time of placement,concrete must have a temperature of at least 40°F. 2) Stop mixing and placing when the air temperature is 38°F or less and falling or if the temperature stops rising and does not reach 38°F. b. Protection:Prior to applying protection,cure all concrete pavement and curb/gutters,including exposed edges of the pavement and curb.In addition,protect concrete less than 36 hours old as follows: 7010—pg 18 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Night Temperature Forecast Type of Protection' 35°F to 32°F One layer of burlap for concrete. 31°F to 25°F Two layers of burlap or one layer of plastic on one layer of burlap. Four layers of burlap between layers of 4 mil Below 25°F plastic or equivalent commercial insulating material approved by the Engineer. 'Keep protection in place until one of the following conditions is met: a. The pavement is 5 calendar days old. b. Opening strength is attained. c. Forecasted low temperatures exceed 35°F for the next 48 hours. d. Forecasted high temperatures exceed 55°F for the next 24 hours and subgrade temperatures are above 40°F 1) Shut down paving operations in time to comply with protection requirements outlined above. During cold weather,allow more time for finishing and protection.Perform all finishing and covering operations prior to darkness.Temperature restrictions and protection requirements may be modified by the Engineer. 2) Equivalent commercial insulating material approved by the Engineer may be used. This material must be waterproof and have a minimum R value of 1.0. If initial set has not yet occurred,place a layer of burlap on top of concrete prior to placing insulating blankets. 3) Use a method of protection and materials that will maintain the concrete temperature above 40°F. 2. Hot Weather:Hot weather condition is defined as any combination of the following conditions that tend to impair the quality of plastic concrete by accelerating the rate of moisture loss and rate of cement hydration causing thermal shrinkage and resulting in plastic shrinkage cracking: • High Ambient Temperature • High Concrete Temperature • Low Relative Humidity • High Wind Velocity • Solar Radiation a. General: 1) During hot weather conditions,the Engineer may restrict concrete placement to early morning or evening hours. 2) During hot weather conditions,advise the Engineer of the results of the theoretical evaporation rate throughout paving operations. b. Determine the Theoretical Rate of Evaporation:Use the following chart and the National Weather Service's predicted maximum air temperature,relative humidity,and maximum steady wind velocity without gusts,for the date and the location of the paving pour. Theoretical Rate of Evaporation Chart Relative Humidity (7.) Plastic Concrete Temperature IT) - IIIII 1 IIIIII _ - I- - 1 -1- -1 - ' , -1- -1 - 1 - 1 - -1- - _ ' - ' 1 1 1 , I 1 t 1 1 I.1 1 - 1' -1- -,% - 1 -1- .1 - I ' 1 . I _1_ - 1 1 i / • r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r. / / 1 1 1 1 1 1 I. ! 1 1 1 r .4 L 1_ _1- 1 1 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement To Use this Chart: 1. Enter with air temperature, Move u�to relative humidity. 2. Move right to concrete temperature. 3. Move down to wind velocity. 4. Mover left, read approximate rate of evaporation c. If the evaporation rate exceeds 0.1 pounds per square foot per hour but is less than 0.3 pounds per square foot per hour,provide the following concrete evaporation protection. 1) Immediately apply an approved evaporation retarder to the concrete pavement and curbs or increase the surface cure application to 1.5 times the standard specified rate. 2) Take special precautions to ensure that the forms and subgrade are sufficiently moist or protected to avoid lowering the water content at the pavement/subgrade interface. In hot weather conditions,moisten the subgrade the evening before operations. 3) Ensure that the time between placing and curing is minimized and eliminate delays. 4) Moisten concrete aggregates that are dry and absorptive. 5) Use a fog spray to raise the relative humidity of the ambient air if there is a delay in immediately applying the curing compound. 6) Minimize solar heat by shading,wetting,or covering concrete chutes or other equipment that comes in contact with plastic concrete. d. If the evaporation rate is 0.3 pounds per square foot per hour or greater,discontinue placement of concrete. 3. Rain Protection: a. Have materials available,near the work site,for proper protection of the edges and surface of concrete.Protective material may consist of sheets of burlap or plastic film.Also have planks or other material with suitable stakes that can be used as temporary forms available. b. If initial set has not occurred,take every precaution necessary to protect the surface texture of the concrete. c. If so determined by the Engineer,failure to properly protect concrete will constitute cause for removal and replacement of defective pavement. B. Night Conditions: Perform all finishing and covering operations prior to darkness(half an hour after sunset). Do not commence construction until half an hour before sunrise.Do not place or finish concrete under artificial light,unless approved by the Engineer. 7010—pg 20 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement C. Protection from Traffic: 1. General: a. Protect the new pavement and its appurtenances from traffic,both public and that caused by the Contractor's own employees and agents,at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. This includes the erection and maintenance of warning signs, lights,barricades,watchmen to direct traffic,and pavement bridges or crossovers. b. Do not operate equipment with metal tracks,metal bucket blades,or metal motor patrol blades directly on new paving.Do not unload soil or granular materials,including base rock for storage and future reloading directly onto new paving. 2. End of Day's Run: a. At the end of each day's run and at all side streets,erect and maintain safety barriers and fencing as necessary to protect the pavement from damage. b. Install safety fences within 1 hour of the completion of finishing and curing operations. Leave fences in place and maintained until the concrete has attained the minimum strength or age. c. Intermediate safety fences may be required for the purpose of opening the pavement for access to a side road, side street,or entrance. 3. Repair of Damages:At the discretion of the Engineer,and at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority,repair or replace any part of the pavement damaged by traffic or other causes occurring prior to final acceptance of the pavement. 3.06 USE OF PAVEMENT Time for opening pavement for use is determined by maturity method complying with Iowa DOT Materials I.M. 383 or age and test results. The minimum age and test results needed for opening are shown in Table 7010.01. Table 7010.01: Minimum Age and Tested Strength of Pavement Before Opening Type of Minimum Age Minimum Minimum Flexural Class of Mix Cement For Openings Compressive Strength Center Strenght(psi) Point(psi) C Type I 7 Days2 3,000 575 M Type I 48 Hours 3,000 575 'Opening without testing only allowed upon approval of Engineer 2Five calendar days for concrete 9 inches thick or more. 3.07 TRANSPORTATION RESTRICTIONS A. Do not use concrete transported with continuous agitation when the cement has been in contact with the aggregate more than 90 minutes before it is placed. With the approval of the Engineer,an approved retarding admixture may be used at the rates required in Iowa DOT Materials I.M.403. B. Do not use concrete transported without continuous agitation if the period elapsed between the time the concrete is mixed and the time it is placed is greater than 30 minutes. With the approval of the Engineer, an approved retarding admixture may be used at the rates required in Iowa DOT Materials I.M.403 and the mixed-to-placed time may be extended. C. Ensure the methods of delivering and handling the concrete are such that objectionable segregation of damage to the concrete will not occur,and concrete placing will occur with a minimum of rehandling. D. Thoroughly clean the truck compartment in which concrete is transported and flush with water to ensure that hardened concrete will not accumulate.Discharge the flushing water from the truck compartment to the designated discharge point before it is charged with the next batch. 7010—pg21 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 3.08 QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing:Provide the following material certifications and testing required to be performed by Supplier or Contractor. Table 7010.02:Material Certifications and Testing Applicable Methods of Field Sampling and Testing Material or Tests pp i Acceptance of Construction Item Standard Sampling and Testing Frequency(minimum) Responsible Party I.M.302,306, Cert.Plant Ins 2 1/250 CY or min Gradation 336 p' 1/day Moisture I.M.308,527 Cert.Plant Insp.2 1 per 1/2 day Fine Aggregates 1/250 CY or min Specific Gravity I.M.307 Cert.Plant Insp.2 I/day Quality I.M.209 Approved Source Prior to use I.M.302,306, Cert.Plant Ins 2 1/250 CY or min Gradation 336 p' 1/day Coarse Moisture I.M.308,527 Cert.Plant Insp.2 1 per 1/2 day Aggregates 1/250 CY or min Specific Gravity I.M.307 Cert.Plant Insp.2 1/day Supplier/Contractor Quality I.M.209 Approved Source Prior to use Portland Cement Quality I.M.401 Approved Source Prior to use Fly Ash Quality I.M.491.17 Approved Source Prior to use GGBFS Quality I.M.491.14 Approved Source Prior to use Curing Quality Iowa DOT Approved Source Prior to use Compound Section 4105 Joint Sealer Quality I.M.436.01 Approved Source Prior to use Epoxy Dowel Bars and Quality I.M.451.03B Approved Source Prior to use Assemblies Tie Bars Quality I.M.451 Approved Source Prior to use 1/200 CY or min. Air Content I.M 318,327 Field Test 1/day 1/200 CY or min. Slump I.M.317 Field Test 1/day Plastic Concrete Set of 3/500 CY or Cylinders 6" I.M.315 Field Test two sets/day Engineer I.M.316,327, Field Test Set of 3/500 CY or Beams 328 two sets/day Thickness Field Test 1/200 CY Smoothness SUDAS 7010, Field Test— Project length 3.08 Straightedge Hardened Smoothness SUDAS 7010, Field Test Project length 3.08 Profilograph Concrete SUDAS 7010, 1 core/1000 SY or 3 Contractor Thickness 3 08 Field Test cores/project Strength I.M.383 Maturity Test3 Prior to placement `Refers to the Iowa DOT Materials I.M.s,Iowa DOT Standard Specifications,or SUDAS Standard Specifications. 'Certified plant inspection per Iowa DOT Materials I.M.527. 3The Contractor is responsible for developing the maturity curve for the specified mix,taking maturity readings,and delivering a copy of the results to the Engineer. B. Air Content: 7010—pg 22 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 1. Air content of the concrete will be evaluated according to Iowa DOT Materials I.M.318 and 327. 2. When a test result is outside the tolerance for the target air content,the contractor will be notified immediately.An air test will then be immediately run behind the paver to aid in identifying the limits of the non-complying air.A test result between 5%and 8%behind the paver will be considered complying. This test will represent all concrete from the back of the paver back to the last documented complying test. Make immediate adjustments to the mix production and placement process to bring the air content back within tolerance.Do not use succeeding loads below the lower target air content tolerance by more than 0.5%.Each subsequent load will be tested until air content is within tolerance for two consecutive loads.For all incorporated,non-complying concrete that is out of tolerance,the Engineer will determine if removal and replacement is required or if a price adjustment, according to Table 7010.03,will be applied. Table 7010.03: Concrete Air Content Price Adjustments Air Content Range Minimum Maximum %Payment of Unit Price 1.1* and Below 0% 0.6 to 1.0* 50% 0.1 to 0.5* 75% Low air tolerance limit 100% Target 100% High air tolerance limit 100% 0.1 to 0.5" 95% 0.6 to 1.0" 85% 1.1 to 1.5** 75% 1.6 to 2.0** 60% 2.1** and above 0% *Air content deviation below the acceptable limits **Air content deviation above the acceptable limits C. Pavement Smoothness:Evaluate pavement smoothness for all PCC pavement and overlay surfaces. 1. Straightedge: The Engineer will check PCC pavement surfaces with a 10 foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline.Areas showing high spots of more than 1/4 of an inch in 10 feet will be marked. Complete surface corrections according to the procedures in Iowa DOT Section 2316 to an elevation where the area or spot will not show surface deviations in excess of 1/8 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. Surface corrections will be completed at the direction of the Engineer with no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. 2. Profilograph: a. If specified in the contract documents,comply with Iowa DOT Section 2316 to measure pavement smoothness with a profilograph. b. Evaluate according to the smoothness requirements of Table 7010.04 and make surface corrections and price reductions. Surface corrections will be completed with no additional cost to the Contracting Authority.No incentive for pavement smoothness will be made. Table 7010.04: Pay Factor if Profilograph Used Segment Index(inch/mile) Pay Factor 0-22.0 100% 22.1—30.0 97% 7010—pg 23 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 30.1 and over Grind as directed by Engineer c. Smoothness measurements will be suspended for structures and through intersections D. Pavement Thickness: 1. At locations determined by the Engineer,cut samples from the pavement by drilling with a core bit that will provide samples with a 4 inch outside diameter.Restore the surface by tamping low slump concrete into the hole,finishing,and texturing.The Engineer will witness the core drilling, identify, and take possession of the cores. The Engineer will determine the core locations,measure the cores, and determine the thickness index according to Iowa DOT Material I.M. 346 and 347,except as modified as follows: a. For regular or irregular shaped areas,use a lot size of 1,000 square yards.Include remnants less than 500 square yards in the last lot and remnants greater than 500 square yards in a separate lot, Take a minimum of three cores per project. b. For any core with a deficiency greater than 0.15 inch,take two additional cores in that pavement lot and use the average of the three cores. 2. Coring a pavement or other work for thickness determination may be waived by mutual agreement for sections of the same design thickness less than 2,500 square yards. 3. Based on the thickness index determined by the Engineer,the pavement payment will be as shown in Tables 7010.05 and 7010.06. 4. If the thickness index deficiency is greater than 0.51 for pavements thinner than 9 inches or 0.91 for pavements 9 inches or thicker,the Engineer will study the extent and severity of the deficiency of the pavement areas.The Engineer will require one of the following based on a review on the level of deficiency,the amount of the payment penalty,and the estimated reduction in the design life of the deficient pavement: a. Removal and replacement of the deficient areas with pavement complying with the contract documents at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. b. Completion of an agreement that provides a combination of an extended guarantee period and payment penalty and allows the deficient pavement to be left in place. Table 7010.05:Pay Factor for PCC Pavement for Design Thickness less than 9" Thickness Index Range Percent Payment More than 0 to-0.15 100 -0.16 to-0.25 95 -0.26 to-0.50 85 -0.51 or less As determined by the Engineer 7010—pg 24 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7010- Portland Cement Concrete Pavement Table 7010.06: Pay Factor for PCC Pavement for Design Thickness 9"or Greater Thickness Index Range Percent Payment More than 0.00 to-0.15 100 -0.16 to-0.20 99 -0.21 to-0.25 98 -0.26 to-0.30 97 -0.31 to-0.35 96 -0.36 to-0.40 95 -0.41 to-0.45 94 -0.46 to-0.50 93 -0.51 to-0.55 92 -0.56 to-0.60 91 -0.61 to-0.65 90 -0.66 to-0.70 89 -0.71 to-0.75 88 -0.76 to-0.80 87 -0.81 to-0.85 86 -0.86 to-0.90 85 -0.91 or less As determined by the Engineer E. Defects or Deficiencies: Remove and replace or repair pavement containing excessive cracks,fractures, spalls,or other defects at no additional cost to the Contracting Authority. The method of replacement or repair will be determined by the Engineer. END OF SECTION 7010-pg 25 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways SIDEWALKS,SHARED USE PATHS,AND DRIVEWAYS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.03 SECTION INCLUDES D. Removal of Sidewalks, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways E. Installation of Sidewalks, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Remove existing sidewalks, shared use paths,and driveways. B. Install shared use paths. C. Install sidewalk D. Install driveway. 1.03 SUBMITTALS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as the following: A. PCC mix design. B. HMA mix design. C. Brick source,absorption,compressive strength;samples of brick showing texture and color. D. Submit type and color of detectable warnings. E. Results of required testing. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants,as well as following: A. Portland Cement Concrete: See Section 7010. B. Hot Mix Asphalt: See Section 7020. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Provide 10 calendar days advance notification of a pedestrian path closure to the Engineer and the National Federation of the Blind of Iowa(www.nfbi.org). 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Removal of Sidewalk,Shared Use Path,or Driveway: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards for the area of sidewalk,shared use paths,or driveways removed. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for the area of sidewalk, shared use path, or driveway removal. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,sawing,hauling,and disposal of materials removed. B. Removal of Curb: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in linear feet for removal of curb by grinding or sawing, measured along the back of curb. 7030—pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear foot for the removal of curb. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,hauling and disposal of materials removed. C. Shared Use Paths: 1. Measurement:Each type and thickness of shared use paths will be measured in square yards.The area of manholes,intakes,or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement area. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for each type and thickness of shared use path. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,subgrade preparation,jointing,sampling, smoothness testing and correction,and testing. D. Special Subgrage Preparation for Shared Use Paths: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards for special subgrade preparation.Measured area will include 2 feet outside of the pavement on either side of the path. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for the area of special subgrade preparation. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,water required to bring subgrade moisture content to within the required limits. E. PCC Sidewalk: 1. Measurement:Each thickness of PCC sidewalk will be measured in square yards.The area of manholes,intakes,or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement area. 2. Pavement: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for each thickness of PCC sidewalk. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,minor grade adjustments at driveways and other intersections,subgrade preparation,formwork,additional thickness at thickened edges,jointing, sampling,smoothness testing and correction,and testing. F. Brick Sidewalk: 1. Brick Sidewalk with Sand Base: a. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards for the area of brick sidewalk placed on a sand base. b. Payment:Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for the area of sidewalk. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,subgrade preparation,brick edge restraints, furnishing and place compacted sand base,and sand/cement joint filler. 2. Brick Sidewalk with Concrete Base: a. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards for the area of brick sidewalk placed on c concrete base.The area of concrete base will not be measured separately. b. Payment:Payment will be at the unit price per square yard for the area of sidewalk. c. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,subgrade preparation,concrete base,HMA setting bed,neoprene asphalt adhesive for asphalt setting bed,and sand/cement joint filler. G. Detectable Warnings: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square feet for the area of detectable warnings installed. Paved area beneath detectable warnings will be measured with sidewalk or shared use path item. 2. Payment:Payment will be at the unit price per square foot for the area of detectable warnings installed. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,steel bar supports and manufactured detectable warning panels. 7030—pg 2 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways H. Driveways: 1. Paved Driveways: a. Measurement: Each type and thickness will be measured in square yards. The area of manholes, intakes,or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement area. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price for each type and thickness of driveway. c. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,excavation, subgrade preparation,jointing, sampling,and testing. 2. Granular Surfacing for Driveways: a. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards or tons, as specified in the contract documents,for the quantity of granular surfacing placed. b. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per square yard or ton,as specified. c. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,excavation and preparation of subgrade. I. Sidewalk,Shared Use Path,and Driveway Assurance Testing: 1. The Contractor will not be responsible for concrete compression of HMA density testing unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2. If the contract documents specify that the Contractor is responsible for concrete compression and HMA density testing,performed by an independent testing laboratory hired by the Contractor, measurement and payment will be as follows: a. Measurement: Lump sum item;no measurement will be made. b. Payment: Payment will be at the contract lump sum price. 3. The Contractor will be responsible for payments associated with all retesting resulting from failure of initial tests. 7030—pg 3 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE A. Class B or C concrete with materials complying with Section 7010.Use coarse aggregate of Class 2 durability or better. B. Comply with the following for PCC mixes for sidewalks,shared use paths,and driveway unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. Table 7030.01: PCC Mixes Machine Finish Hand Finish Type of Concrete Class B or C Class B or C Slump Minimum 1/2 in. 1/2 in. Slump Maximum 2 1/2 in. 4 in. Percent Air Content • Target 7% • Minimum 6% 6% • Maximum 8 1/2% 8 1/2% 2.02 HOT MIX ASPHALT Comply with Section 7020 for mix design. A. Use 100,000 ESAL, 1/2 inch or 3/8 inch mix. B. For shared use paths adjacent to pavement that also functions as the pavement shoulder,use 300,000 ESAL, 1/2 inch mix. C. Use asphalt binder complying with Section 7020 with a performance grade of PG 58-28 or 64-22. 2.03 BRICK PAVERS A. Clay:Use 8 inch by 4 inch by 2 1/4 inch thick clay paving bricks manufactured to comply with ASTM C 902,Class SX,Type I.Color selection and surface texture as approved by the Engineer. B. Concrete: Supply as specified in the contract documents. 2.04 HMA SETTING BED FOR BRICK A. Mixture: Proportion mix using 7%asphalt binder and 93%fine aggregate.Apportion each ton in the approximate ratio of 145 pounds asphalt binder to 1,855 pounds sand.Maintain mix temperature at approximately 250°F during placement. B. Asphalt Binder:Use asphalt binder complying with Section 7020 with a performance grade of PG 58-28 or 64-22. C. Fine Aggregate:Use clean,hard sand with durable particles free from adherent coating,lumps of clay, alkali salts,and organic matter.Use sand that is uniformly graded from coarse to fine with all passing the No.4 sieve and meeting AASHTO T 27. 2.05 NEOPRENE MODIFIED ASPHALT ADHESIVE FOR BRICK A. Mastic(Asphalt Adhesive): Solids(Base): 74%to 76% Pounds per Gallon: 8 to 8 1/2 pounds Solvent: Mineral spirits with a flash point above 100°F 2.05 NEOPRENE MODIFIED ASPHALT ADHESIVE FOR BRICK(Continued) B. Base(2%Neoprene, 10%Asbestos-free Fiber,88%Asphalt): 7030—pg 4 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways Melting Point: 200°F minimum according to ASTM D 36 Penetration: 23 to 27 according to ASTM D 5 1250 mm minimum according to ASTM D 113 @ 25°C,and a Ductility: rate of 50 mm/minute 2.06 BRICK JOINT FILLER Dry sand-cement mixture consisting of one part masonry cement complying with ASTM C 91 and three parts sand complying with ASTM C 144 and passing the No. 16 sieve.Provide colored cement to match bricks. 2.07 DETECTABLE WARNINGS Use manufactured detectable warning panels or brick pavers with a non-slip surface and raised truncated domes. Comply with the Proposed Accessibility Guidelines for Pedestrian Facilities in the Public Right-of- Way(also known as PROWAG)for contrast and dimension requirements.Also comply with Iowa DOT Materials I.M.411. 2.08 GRANULAR DRIVEWAY SURFACING Class A crushed stone or Class C gravel complying with Iowa DOT Section 2315. 2.09 ISOLATION AND EXPANSION JOINT SEALANT Use a polyurethane, self-leveling sealant complying with ASTM C 920.Application temperature range of 40 to 120°F.Minimum elongation 700%. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 REMOVALS 7030—pg 5 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways A. Remove sidewalks,shared use paths,driveways,bricks,and curbs to the removal limits specified in the contract documents. B. Saw pavement full depth in straight lines to the specified removal limits. C. Remove to the specified removal limits without damage to adjacent property,trees,utilities,or pavement that are to remain in place. D. Salvage and stockpile all bricks removed. E. Grind or saw existing curbs at locations specified in the contract documents to install sidewalks,shared use paths,and driveways. F. Dispose of rubble and debris resulting from removal operations. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION A. Shared Use Paths: 1. Subgrade Preparation: Comply with Iowa DOT Section 2109. 2. Special Subgrade Preparation: a. Construct subgrade to final elevation. b. Scarify and mix the top 6 inches of subgrade material to a width equal to that of the proposed pavement,plus 2 feet on each side. c. Compact loose subgrade material with Type A compaction complying with Section 2010. d. Proof roll compacted subgrade according to Section 2010. B. Sidewalks and Driveways: 1. Remove all vegetation and roots from ground surface. 2. Construct grade to fmal subgrade elevation. a. Cut area:Remove all material that will be displaced by the sidewalk. b. Fill area: Scarify the surface to be covered with embankment to a depth of at least 6 inches and compact. Construct embankment in lifts of 6 inches or less and compact each lift.Tamp surface with a mechanical tamper until firm and unyielding. 3. Remove all soft,spongy,or yielding spots and fill the void with suitable backfill material. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT OF FIXTURES A. Adjust fixtures to conform to the finished pavement surface. Cooperate and coordinate with the utility agency to ensure proper fixture adjustment. B. Comply with Sections 5020,6010,or 8010 as appropriate. 3.04 PCC SIDEWALKS,SHARED USE PATHS,AND DRIVEWAYS A. Form Setting: Comply with Section 7010 with the following additional requirements and exceptions. 1. Slip form paving equipment may be allowed in lieu of setting forms,if approved by the Engineer. 2. Wood forms are allowed. 3. Use of an automated subgrade trimmer is not required. 4. Set forms true to line and grade and hold them rigidly in place by stakes placed outside the forms and flush with or below the top edge of the forms. B. Concrete Pavement Placement: 1. Shared Use Paths: Comply with Section 7010. 2. Sidewalk: a. Maintain moist subgrade in front of paving operation. 7030—pg 6 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk,Shared Use Paths,and Driveways b. Deposit concrete on the subgrade as required to minimize rehandling to prevent segregation. c. Hand spread with shovels,not rakes. d. Place concrete as required to slightly overfill the space between the forms. e. Consolidate with vibrators and smooth by use of a straightedge. f. Do not contaminate freshly mixed concrete with earth or other foreign materials. 3. Driveways: Comply with Figures 7030.101 and 7030.102 and Section 7010.The use of a paving machine is not required. C. Finishing: 1. Shared Use Paths and Driveways: a. Comply with Section 7010. b. Provide a burlap drag or broom fmish. 2. Sidewalks: a. Use a wood float to depress the large aggregate and create a dense surface. b. Allow concrete to set until all shine has disappeared from the surface. c. Smooth with a metal trowel until surface is free from defects and blemishes. d. Construct joints by sawing or by using a jointer or groover tool. e. Finish edges of sidewalk or driveway with an edging tool having a radius of approximately 1/2 inch. Ensure tool marks do not appear on the finished surface. f Brush with a soft broom at right angles to the side forms to provide a non-skid surface. D. Curing: When curing is specified in the contract documents,comply with Section 7010. E. Form Removal: Comply with Section 7010. F. Jointing: 1. Construction Joints: a. Locate construction joints to provide uniform joint spacing. b. Place a construction joint at the close of each day's work or when depositing of concrete is stopped for 45 minutes or more. c. Form construction joint by using a header board. Set perpendicular to the surface and at right angles to the centerline. 2. Transverse Contraction Joints: a. Shared Use Paths: 1) Space transverse joints equal to the width of the shared use path,or as specified in the contract documents. 2) Saw contraction joints according to Section 7010. b. Sidewalks and Driveways: 1) Space sidewalk contraction joints equal to the width of the sidewalk. 2) Space driveway contraction joints so panel length does not exceed 12 feet. 3) Form transverse contraction joints to a depth of 1 1/4 inches with a pointed trowel or jointing tool. In lieu of forming,joints may be sawed within 12 hours of placement with a 1/8 inch blade saw to a depth of 1/3 the pavement thickness.Use a straightedge if joints are sawed with a hand-held saw. 3. Longitudinal Contraction Joints: a. Shared Use Paths and Sidewalks: Saw joint to 1/8 inch wide and to a depth of 1/3 the pavement thickness. b. Driveways: 1) Space longitudinal contraction joints so panel width does not exceed 12 feet. 2) Form longitudinal contraction joints to a depth of 1 1/4 inches with a pointed trowel or jointing tool.In lieu of forming,joints may be sawed with a 1/8 inch blade saw to a depth of 1/3 the pavement thickness.Use a straightedge if joints are sawed with a hand-held saw. 4. Isolation Joints: 7030—pg 7 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways a. Install isolation joints where sidewalks,shared use paths,or driveways abut roadway pavement, parking lots,buildings,and structures. b. For a sidewalk constructed with a driveway,install an isolation joint on the property side of the sidewalk and a'C' or`E'joint on the street side of the sidewalk. c. Install a 1/2 inch or 3/4 inch thick strip of preformed resilient joint material,according to Section 7010,to the full depth of concrete.Trim any isolation joint material protruding above the finished work to the level of the abutting concrete. d. If the isolation joint is to be sealed,place the preformed material 1/2 inch below the level of the abutting concrete. 5. Joint Sealing: a. Do not seal construction or contraction joints in sidewalks,shared use paths,or driveways. b. If sealing of expansion or isolation joint is specified in the contract documents,trim preformed joint material to a depth of 1/2 inch below the concrete surface.Ensure the joint is clean and dry.Install joint sealant per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.05 HMA SHARED USE PATHS AND DRIVEWAYS Comply with Section 7020. 3.06 BRICK SIDEWALKS A. Brick Sidewalk with a Sand Base: 1. Comply with Figure 7030.203. 2. Use a cross-section and patterns as specified in the contract documents or approved by the Engineer. 3. Do not use broken bricks or materials with stained faces in the paving areas. 4. Set edge restraints true to line and grade along both edges of brick sidewalk. 5. Place bricks on smooth,compacted bedding sand and tightly set in place without gaps. 6. Compact bricks using a 3 to 5 ton roller or machine with a vibratory plate weighing a minimum of 100 pounds. 7. Tightly compact joints with brick sand/cement. B. Brick Sidewalks with a Concrete Base: 1. General: a. Comply with Figure 7030.203. b. Use a cross-section and patterns as specified in the contract documents or approved by the Engineer. c. Do not use broken bricks or materials with stained faces in the paving areas. d. Construct the concrete base to comply with PCC sidewalk construction specifications. 2. HMA Setting Bed: a. Place 3/4 inch depth control bars on the base to serve as guides for the striking board. Shim depth control bars as necessary to adjust bedding thickness and to ensure the top surface of pavers will be at the required finished grade. b. Place HMA bedding material between the parallel depth control bars.Pull striking board over bars several times.After each pass,spread fresh bedding material over low or porous spots to produce a smooth and even setting bed.After placing and smoothing each section,advance depth control bars to next section.After removal of depth control bars and shims,carefully fill any depressions that remain. c. While still hot,roll the HMA bedding with a power roller to a nominal depth of 3/4 inch. d. Ensure the joints in the concrete base do not project through the HMA setting bed. e. Apply neoprene modified asphalt adhesive over the top surface of the cooled asphalt setting bed with notched trowel with serration not exceeding 1/16 inch.Allow adhesive to dry to the touch before placing pavers. 3. Brick Pavers: 7030—pg 8 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways a. Place the pavers by hand in straight courses with hand tight joints and uniform top surface. b. Sweep dry joint filler into joints until the joints are completely filled. c. Fog surface lightly with water to cure cement. d. Clean any cement stains from brick surface.Remove stains from other concrete surfaces. 4. Protection: Protect newly laid pavers at all times using panels of plywood.Panels can be advanced as work progresses;however,keep the plywood protection in areas that will be subjected to movement of materials,workers,and equipment. Take precautions in order to avoid depressions and protect paver alignment until cured and ready for pedestrian or vehicle traffic. 3.07 DETECTABLE WARNING INSTALLATION A. Manufactured Panels: 1. Comply with Figure 7030.210. 2. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Set panels in fresh concrete. B. Brick Pavers: 1. Comply with Figure 7030.203. 2. Install according to Section 7030,3.06. 3.08 TOLERANCES FOR SHARED USE PATHS AND DRIVEWAYS A. Check fmished surface with a 10 foot straightedge placed parallel to the centerline. B. Ensure the cross-section and profile of the pavement is constructed to within a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 10 feet(0.2%)of the design grades. This does not allow maximum slopes to be exceeded. C. Mark areas showing bumps of more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet and grind down with an approved grinding tool to an elevation where the area will not show deviations in excess of 1/8 inch. 3.09 GRANULAR DRIVEWAY SURFACING Comply with Iowa DOT Section 2315. 3.10 CLEANING A. Remove all litter and construction materials or tools immediately after the end of the curing period. B. Remove excess dirt from the site. C. Broom clean completed sidewalks,shared use paths,and driveways. 3.11 TESTING A. General: When testing is specified in the contract documents as the Contractor's responsibility,provide testing using the services of an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer B. Concrete Compression Tests: When the concrete volume placed on a single day exceeds 20 cubic yards, comply with the following test requirements. When deficiencies are encountered,comply with Section 7010,3.08,E. 1. Prepare at least two test cylinders per day. 2. If the concrete volume placed on a single day exceeds 200 cubic yards,prepare two test cylinders for each 200 cubic yards placed. 3. Provide 7 and 28 calendar day tests according to ASTM C 39.Minimum compressive strength is 2,000 psi at 7 days and 4,000 psi at 28 days. C. HMA Density and Thickness Tests: When the area of HMA placed on a single day exceeds 100 square yards,comply with the following test requirement. When deficiencies are encountered,comply with Section 7020,3.04,A. 7030—pg 9 Standard Specifications Division 7- Streets and Related Work Section 7030- Sidewalk, Shared Use Paths,and Driveways 1. Prepare at least two cores per day. 2. If the area of HMA placed on a single day exceeds 2,000 square yards,prepare two cores for each 2,000 square yards placed. 3.12 SIDEWALK AND CURB RAMP COMPLIANCE Compliance with cross slopes and grades,as well as all other elements,for sidewalk and curb ramps is crucial. If the construction cannot be completed as specified in the contract documents,it may be necessary to adjust slopes within the accepted legal limitations. Contact the Engineer prior to placement of the concrete if changes from the values specified in the contract documents are being made. END OF SECTION 7030—pg 10 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING PAVERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Subgrade Preparation B. Placement of Storage Aggregate C. Placement of Filter Aggregate D. Placement of Bedding Course E. Placement of Permeable Interlocking Paveres F. Quality Control G. Protection of the Pavement 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK Construct permeable interlocking pavement for mitigation of stormwater runoff. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Sample Pavers: Representative of the type and color proposed for the project. B. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's published installation instructions. C. Material Certification: Submit certification letter from paver manufacturer indicating compliance with the ASTM specifications and the contract documents. D. Bedding,Filter,and Storage Aggregates: Submit 5 pound samples of each aggregate type.Include aggregate type,source,gradation,and compacted void content. E. Project Details: Include schedule,construction procedures,and quality control plan that describes material staging;paving direction;details of placement and compaction of the storage,filter,and bedding aggregate;and the paver installation procedures. F. Involved Parties: Submit a list of all subcontractors,material suppliers,and testing laboratories. 1.04 SUBSTITUTIONS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.05 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.06 SCHEDULING AND CONFLICTS Comply with Division 1 —General Provisions and Covenants. 1.07 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Qualifications of Paver Installer: 1. Experience: Successful completion of paver installations similar in design,material,and extent. Provide project location,owner name,and email contact information. 2. Certification: Successful completion of a permeable paver installation certification course developed by the Interlocking Concrete Paver Institute or the School for Advanced Segmental Paving. B. Test Section: Install a 5 foot by 5 foot mock-up paver area on the prepared substrate to determine joint sizes,lines,laying patterns,paver edge treatments,colors,and texture of the project.If approved by the Engineer, it may be incorporated into the project. 1.08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. Class 10,Class 12,or Class 13 Excavation: Comply with Section 2010, 1.08,E. 7080—pg 1 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers B. Engineering Fabric: 1. Measurement:Measurement will be in square yards for the surface area covered with engineering fabric.Both horizontal and vertical areas covered with engineering fabric will be measured. 2. Payment:Payment will be made at the unit price per square yard of engineering fabric. 3. Includes: Unit price includes,but is not limited to,placing and securing filter fabric and any overlapped areas. C. Underdrain: 1. Measurement: Each type and size of pipe installed will be measured in linear feet from end of pipe to end of pipe along the centerline of pipe,exclusive of outlets.The vertical height of cleanouts;the vertical height of observation wells;and lengths of elbows,tees,wyes,and other fittings will be included in the length of pipe measured. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price of each type and size of pipe. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing and placing pipe,cleanouts, observation wells,and pipe fittings. D. Storage Aggregate: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in tons based upon scale tickets for the material delivered and incorporated into the project. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per ton of storage aggregate. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing,hauling,placing,and compacting storage aggregate. E. Filter Aggregate: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in tons based upon scale tickets for the material delivered and incorporated into the project. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per ton of filter aggregate. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,furnishing,hauling,placing filter,and compacting aggregate. F. Permeable Interlocking Pavers: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in square yards for the area of each type of permeable interlocking pavers installed. The area of manholes,intakes,or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement area. 2. Payment: Payment will be made at the unit price per square yard of each type of permeable interlocking pavers. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,testing,placement of bedding course,installing permeable interlocking pavers,placing joint/opening fill material,refilling joint after 6 months,and pavement protection. G. PCC Edge Restraint: 1. Measurement: Measurement will be in linear feet for each type and size of PCC edge restraint.The area of manholes, intakes,or other fixtures in the pavement will not be deducted from the measured pavement area. 2. Payment: Payment will be at the unit price per linear feet for each type and size of PCC edge restraint. 3. Includes:Unit price includes,but is not limited to,final trimming of subgrade or subbase,bars and reinforcement,joints and sealing,surface curing and pavement protection,safety fencing,and boxouts for fixtures. 7080—pg 2 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers 7080—pg 3 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 ENGINEERING FABRIC Comply with Iowa DOT Section 4196,requirements for subsurface drainage. 2.02 UNDERDRAIN A. Provide slotted or perforated pipe(s)complying with the requirements for Type 1 Subdrain in Section 4040. B. Provide 6 inch diameter collector pipes unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. C. Provide 4 inch diameter lateral pipes unless otherwise specified in the contract documents. 2.03 AGGREGATE Provide crushed stone with 90%fractured faces.Wash all stone materials to ensure less than 2%passing the No.200 sieve. A. Storage Aggregate: Aggregate complying with Iowa DOT Section 4122,Gradation No. 13,Class 2 durability(AASHTO M 43/ASTM D 448, Size 2). B. Filter Aggregate:Aggregate complying with Iowa DOT Section 4115,Gradation No. 3,Class 2 durability(AASHTO M 43/ASTM D 448, Size 57). C. Bedding/Joint/Void Filler Aggregate: Crushed stone complying with Iowa DOT Section 4125, Gradation No.29(AASHTO M 43/ASTM D 448, Size 8). 2.04 PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING PAVERS A. Interlocking Concrete Pavers: Comply with ASTM C 936 for minimum 3 1/8 inch thick pavers. B. Clay Brick Pavers: Comply with ASTM C 1272 for minimum 2 3/4 inch thick,Type F brick for PX applications. 2.05 PCC EDGE RESTRAINT Provide PCC edge restraint complying with Section 7010.A PCC edge restraint may be standard curb and gutter section,a vertical curb section,or a narrow concrete slab. 7080—pg 4 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-INSTALLATION PROTECTION A. Complete grading,utility installation,and other earth disturbing operations prior to excavating for the permeable paver system. B. Prior to placing permeable interlocking pavers, install sediment control practices upstream to protect the area from sediment in stormwater runoff from disturbed soil. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION FOR PERMEABLE INTERLOCKING PAVERS A. Excavate area to the elevations and grades specified in the contract documents. B. When underdrain is specified,excavate a minimum 12 inch wide by 8 inch deep trench at locations specified in the contract documents. C. Where fill materials are required,compact materials to 95%of maximum Modified Proctor Density.Do not over compact. D. Fill and lightly re-grade any areas damaged by erosion,ponding,or traffic compaction prior to placing the engineering fabric. 3.03 ENGINEERING FABRIC A. Install engineering fabric over completed subgrade,including trench for underdrain when specified. B. Overlap adjacent strips of fabric a minimum of 12 inches. C. Extend fabric up the sides of the subbase trench to the bottom of the proposed pavement. 3.04 UNDERDRAIN A. Underdrain Collector Pipes: 1. Place 2 inches of filter aggregate in the bottom of the underdrain trench over engineering fabric. 2. Begin underdrain collector installation at the outlet and continue upgrade. 3. Lay underdrain collector pipe to the proper line and grade.Place pipe with perforations down. 4. Place filter aggregate over installed pipe in layers no more than 6 inches thick. Thoroughly tamp each layer with mechanical tampers. 5. Provide cleanouts where specified in the contract documents. Comply with Figure 4040.232. 6. Connect underdrain collector to outlet.Comply with Figure 4040.233. Install rodent guard on all underdrain pipe 6 inches or smaller. 7. Install underdrain cleanout pipes and observation wells as specified in the contract documents. B. Underdrain Lateral Pipes: 1. Place 2 inches of filter aggregate over the bottom of the prepared subgrade at lateral pipe locations specified in the contract documents. 2. Lay underdrain lateral over filter aggregate to the proper line and grade.Place pipe with perforations down. 3. Connect underdrain laterals to underdrain collector with wye or tee fitting. 4. Install plug or cap on upstream end of lateral pipe. 5. Place additional filter aggregate along each side of the lateral pipe to the springline of the pipe. 3.05 STORAGE AGGREGATE A. Place storage aggregate in 6 inch maximum lifts to the thickness specified in the contract documents.If underdrain system is specified,take care not to damage or displace pipe during placement of storage aggregate. 7080—pg 5 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers B. Compact each lift with a vibratory drum roller until no visible movement can be seen in the aggregate layer.Do not crush aggregate.Do not operate compaction equipment directly over underdrain,until a minimum of 12 inches of storage aggregate is placed over the underdrain. C. Install storage aggregate to the elevation specified in the contract documents. 3.06 FILTER AGGREGATE A. Place filter aggregate directly over storage aggregate. B. Install aggregate in a single lift with a thickness of 4 inches. C. Lightly compact filter aggregate with one or two passes from a vibratory plate compactor or vibratory roller. If a vibratory roller is utilized,perform the final pass without vibration.Do not crush aggregate. 3.07 BEDDING AGGREGATE A. Place bedding aggregate directly over filter aggregate. B. Install aggregate in a single lift with a thickness of 2 inches. C. Use laser guided spreader or place screed rails on the completed filter aggregate layer.Use screed width no less than the full width of each cross-section component of the roadway and no less than 16 feet for parking areas. Surface variations must be within 3/8 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge prior to compaction. D. Lightly compact bedding aggregate with one or two passes from a vibratory plate compactor or vibratory roller.Recheck tolerance following compaction and make necessary corrections.Ensure surface is even, smooth with no roller ridges,and at the proper elevation to accommodate the pavers. E. Restrict pedestrians and equipment from screeded bedding prior to placement of pavers. 3.08 INSTALLING PCC EDGE RESTRAINT Place PCC edge restraint according to Section 7010. 3.09 INSTALLING INTERLOCKING PERMEABLE PAVER SYSTEM Place and install pavers according to the pattern specified,the paver manufacturer's published installation specifications,and the following: A. Where pavers are placed against a curb and gutter or other pavement, installation of an edge course or soldier course is required if the pavement edge is not straight. Trim pavers as required to compensate for deviations in the adjacent pavement edge.Do not cut pavers to less than 1/3 their original size. B. Install PCC edge restraint. C. Place chalk lines on the bedding course to maintain straight joint lines. D. After pavers have been installed on the bedding course,and all cut pavers have been inserted to provide a full and complete surface,inspect pavers for damaged units and irregular joint lines.Remove and replace pavers as required. E. After inspection and replacement of damaged pavers,fill joint openings with bedding stone. Sweep the surface clean. F. Compact pavement surface with two passes of a vibratory plate compactor capable of at least 5,000 pounds centrifugal compaction force.Do not operate plate compactor within 6 feet of an unrestrained pavement edge. G. Re-inspect pavers,and remove and replace all damaged units.Refill joint openings completely. Sweep pavers clean. Complete compaction with two passes of the plate compactor. H. Refill all paver joint openings with bedding aggregate 6 months after installation. 3.10 QUALITY CONTROL A. Ensure horizontal alignment of the PCC edge restraint is within 1/2 inch of design alignment. 7080—pg 6 Standard Specifications Division 7—Streets and Related Work Section 7080—Permeable Interlocking Pavers B. Ensure final surface is within 3/8 inch when tested with a 10 foot straightedge. C. Ensure no greater than 1/8 inch difference in height between adjacent pavers. D. Maintain surface elevation within 1/4 inch above adjacent drainage inlets,gutters,and other appurtenances. 3.11 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT A. Protect pavement from heavy construction traffic, including trucks,skid steers,loaders,and all tracked vehicles. B. Provide barriers and protection as necessary. C. Do not place soil,mulch, sand,aggregate,or stockpile other materials on the pavement surface that may contaminate the pavement and plug the porous surface. D. Remove by vacuuming any base and bedding materials contaminated with sediment and replace with clean materials at no cost to the contracting authority. END OF SECTION 7080—pg 7 e s. f a K a st,